autocad

‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻮﺻﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪www.boosla.com‬‬

By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez

Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials

Table of Contents ‫ﻓﻬﺮس اﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬ 7 ............................................................ Lesson 1: Working with Projects ‫ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻤﺸﺎرﻳﻊ‬:‫اﻟﺪرس اﻷول‬ 7 ......................................................... Creating a New Drawing and Project ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺸﺮوع و رﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ 8 .....................................................................Setting Up the Point Database ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 9 .................................................................................. Setting Up the New Drawing ‫إﻋﺪاد رﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ 14 ............................................. Reviewing the Project Directory Structure ‫اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض ﻣﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع‬ 15 ............................................. Lesson 2: Changing Project Settings ‫ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع‬:‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‬ 15 ..... Copying a Project and Re-associating the Current Drawing ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺸﺮوع و إﻋﺎدة رﺑﻂ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬ 17 ................................................... Changing Drawing Setup Parameters ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ 20 ................................................................................ Editing Drawing Settings ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ 22 ..................................................... Lesson 3: Working with Point Objects ‫ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬:‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‬ 22 ........................................................................................... Listing Point Objects ‫اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 23 ........................................ Inserting Points from the Point Database ‫إدراج ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 25 .............................................................................. Changing Point Elevations ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 27 ....................................................... Changing Point Display Properties ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 28 .......................................................... Changing Point Markers and Text ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و اﻟﻨﺺ‬ 31 ........................................ Controlling Point Display by Layer ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت‬ 32 .............................................................................. Lesson 4:Creating Points ‫ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط‬:‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ‬ 32 ................................................................................... Creating Points Manually ‫إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻳﺪوﻳﺎ‬ 33 .............................. Specifying Automatic Elevations and Descriptions ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب و وﺻﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ 34 ............................................... Creating Points in the Points Database ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط داﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬ 36 ........................................................................... Placing Points on an Object ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ آﺎﺋﻦ‬ 36 ................................................... Placing Points Along an Alignment ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ 37 .......................................................................... Placing Points on a Surface ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ‬ 39 ............................................................................ Lesson5: Editing Points ‫ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬:‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ‬ 39 ................................................................................... Selecting Points to Edit ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬ 41 .......................................................................................... Unlocking Points ‫إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 42 ..........................................................................Editing Point Datum ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 43 ............................ Editing Points with AutoCAD Commands AutoCAD ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ‬ 44 .............................................................................................Using Check Points ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 46 ....................................... Lesson 6: Working with Point Groups ‫ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬:‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎدس‬ 46 ..................................................................................... Creating a Point Group ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط‬ Creating a Point Group Using the Raw Desc ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ 47 .......................................................................................................................... Matching Tab 49 .............................................. Applying Overrides to Point Groups ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻟﻬﻴﻤﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 51 ............................................................................... Updating Point Groups ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 53 ................................................... Organizing Points by Descriptions ‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬:‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ‬ 53 .................................................................. Creating a Description Key File ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ‬ 55 ................................................................................ Creating Description Keys ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ‬ 57 ....................................................................................... Creating a Label Style ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان‬ 59 ......................................................Inserting Points with Description Keys ‫إدراج ﻧﻘﺎط ﺑﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ وﺻﻒ‬ 60 ...... Lesson 8: Importing Points from an ASCII Text File ‫ اﻟﻨﺼﻲ‬ASCII ‫ اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ‬:‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ‬ 60 .......................................................................... Creating a Point File Format ‫إﻧﺸﺎء هﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﺎط‬ 63 ................................................... Importing an ASCII Text Point File ‫ ﻧﺼﻲ‬ASCII ‫اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﺎط‬ Lesson 9: Labeling Lines, Curves, Spirals ‫ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت و اﻷﺷﻜﺎل اﻟﺤﻠﺰوﻧﻴﺔ و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬:‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ‬ 66 .................................................................................................................................. and Points 66 ............................................................................... Changing Label Settings ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ‬ 68 ........................................................................... Labeling Lines and Points ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 71 ................................................ Changing a Label Attached to an Object ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻜﺎﺋﻦ‬ 73 ... Lesson 10: Creating Label Styles for Lines and Points ‫ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬:‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ‬ 73 ........................................................ Creating a New Line Label Style ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط‬ 76 ........................................................................................................... Labeling a Line ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺧﻂ‬ -3-

By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez

Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials

77 ..........................................................Creating a New Point Label Style ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط‬ 79 ........................................................................................................ Labeling a Point ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ 82 Lesson 11: Creating Tag Labels and Object Tables ‫ إﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ و ﺟﺪاول ﻟﻠﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت‬:‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺤﺎدي ﻋﺸﺮ‬ 82 .................................................................... Creating a New Tag Style ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ‬ 83 .................................................................... Labeling Objects with Tags ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ‬ 84 ..................................................................................... Creating a Line Table ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط‬ 87 ...................................................................................... Creating a Point Table ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط‬ 91 ........................................... Updating (Re-drawing) an Object Table ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ )إﻋﺎدة ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ( ﺟﺪول‬ 92 ............................................................................ Understanding Table Objects ‫ﻓﻬﻢ اﻟﺠﺪول آﻜﺎﺋﻦ‬ 96 ... Lesson 12: Working with the Terrain Model Explorer‫ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻷرض‬:‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ‬ 96 .................................................................... Creating a New Surface Folder ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ 97 ........................................................................................Adding Point Data ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ 98 .......................................................................... Adding Contour Data ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر‬ 99 .................................................. Adding Breakline Data from Points ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎط‬ 102 ............. Adding Breakline Data from 3D Polylines ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻼﺛﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد‬ 103 ..................... Adding Breakline Data from 2D Polylines ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد‬ 105 ............................................................. Adding Surface Boundary Data ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‬ 106 .....................................................................................................Building a Surface ‫ﺑﻨﺎء ﺳﻄﺢ‬ 108 ............................................................ Lesson 13: Editing Surfaces ‫ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ‬:‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﺸﺮ‬ 108 ................................................................ Identifying Triangulation Problems ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺎآﻞ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ‬ 109 .......................................................................... Adding Points to the Surface ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ‬ 110 .............................................. Adding and Deleting TIN Lines ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أو ﺣﺬف ﺧﻄﻮط ﻣﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت‬ 111 ................................................................................... Flipping TIN Faces ‫ﻗﻠﺐ أوﺟﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت‬ 113 ................................................................. Applying Surface Edit History ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‬ 114 .......................................................... Lesson 14: Creating Contours ‫ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر‬:‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ‬ 114 ................................................................................................. Creating Contours ‫إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر‬ 115 .................................................................. Creating a New Contour Style ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻜﻨﺘﻮر‬ 118 ................................................................. Applying a New Contour Style ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻜﻨﺘﻮر‬ 119 ........................................................................... Labeling Contours (‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر )إدراج اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ‬ 121 .......................................................................... Converting Contour Objects ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ آﺎﺋﻦ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر‬ 122 ................................................................................................... Editing Contours ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر‬ 124 ................................................... Lesson 15: Generating Sections ‫ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت‬:‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ ﻋﺸﺮ‬ 124 ...... Defining and Processing Sections From Single Surface ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ و ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ‬ 125 ........................................ Importing Sections From Single Surface ‫اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ‬ 126 .. Creating and Processing Sections from Multiple Surfaces ‫إﻧﺸﺎء و ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ 127 ..................................Importing Sections From Multiple Surfaces ‫اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة‬ 127 .................................................................... Viewing Dynamic Sections ‫ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮآﺔ‬ 130 ..................................................... Lesson 16: Visualizing Surfaces ‫ ﺗﺼﻮر اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‬:‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎدس ﻋﺸﺮ‬ 130 ........................................................................ Creating Elevation Banding ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع‬ 132 ......................................... Viewing Surfaces in the Object Viewer ‫ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة اﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت‬ 133 ................................. Using Object Viewer Navigation Tools ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أدوات اﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت‬ 134 ............................................................ Delineating Watershed Areas ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎت ﻣﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ‬ 138 .........................................Lesson 17: Calculating Site Volumes ‫ ﺣﺴﺎب آﻤﻴﺎت ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬:‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ‬ 138 .................................................................... Defining a Stratum and a Site ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ و اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬ 141 ................................................................... Calculating Grid Volumes ‫ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ 144 ..................................................... Calculating Composite Volumes ‫ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت‬ 146 ............................................. Calculating Section Method Volumes ‫ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت‬ 148 .........................................................................Viewing the Volume Report ‫ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت‬ 149 ..................................................................... Calculating Parcel Volumes ‫ﺣﺴﺎب آﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ أرض‬ 151 ................................................... Generating Cut and Fill Contours ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺮ و اﻟﺮدم‬ 153 ..................................................... Generating Grid Ticks and Labels ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ و اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ‬ 155 . Lesson 18: Drawing Tangents, Curves, and Spirals ‫ رﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ و اﻟﺤﻠﺰون‬:‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻋﺸﺮ‬ 155 ................................................................................................... Drawing Tangents ‫رﺳﻢ ﻣﻤﺎس‬ -4-

By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez

Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials

156 .................................................................................................... Drawing Curves ‫رﺳﻢ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت‬ 157 ...................................................................................................... Drawing Spirals ‫رﺳﻢ ﺣﻠﺰون‬ 158 ........................................................................ Working with Speed Tables ‫اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺠﺪاول اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ 162 ................................................ Attaching Multiple Alignment Objects ‫رﺑﻂ ﻋﺪة آﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﺧﻄﻮط اﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ 164 ............... Lesson 19: Defining and Editing Alignments ‫ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ و ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬:‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ‬ 164 ........................................ Defining an Alignment from a Polyline ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط‬ 165 .............................................. Defining an Alignment from Objects ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪة آﺎﺋﻨﺎت‬ 167 ........................................... Viewing and Editing Alignment Data ‫ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة و ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ 169 ................................................................Generating Alignment Reports ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺗﻘﺎرﻳﺮ ﻟﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ Lesson 20: Creating Alignment Stationing and Offsets ‫ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺤﻄﺎت و إزاﺣﺔ ﻟﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬:‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﻌﺸﺮون‬ 171 .................................................................................................................................................

171 .......................................................................... Changing Station Settings ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ‬ 173 ........................................................... Generating Alignment Stationing ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﻄﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ 176 ..................................................................................................... Creating Offsets ‫إﻧﺸﺎء إزاﺣﺔ‬

-5-

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪروس و اﻟﺘﻲ هﻲ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺘﻌﺮض ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻟﺪروس و ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﺎدة اﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ اﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ و ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ إﻟﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﻤﺸﺎرﻳﻊ و هﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪C:\Program Files\Land Desktop 2006\Landtut‬‬ ‫ﻓﺈذا آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ أﺟﺮﻳﺖ درس ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ و ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻄﺒـﻴـﻘﻪ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺗﻪ إﻟﻲ هﺬا اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ \‪Land Projects 2006‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ إﺟﺮاء اﻟﺪرس ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪-6-‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﻟﺪرس اﻷول‪ :‬اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻤﺸﺎرﻳﻊ ‪Lesson 1: Working with Projects‬‬ ‫أول ﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻪ هﻮ أن اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪ Drawings‬ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻤﺸﺮوع ‪ Project‬و اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﻋﺒﺎرة ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮن رﺳﻮﻣﺎت أو ﻧﻘﺎط أو أﺳﻄﺢ أو ﺧﻂ أﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ أو أرﺻﺎد ﻣﺴﺎﺣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫إن ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﻻ ﺗﺤﻔﻆ داﺧﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪ Drawing‬و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪات ‪ Folders‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ داﺧﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺸﺮوع و رﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪Creating a New Drawing and Project‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻢ آﻴﻔﻴﺔ إﻧﺸﺎء رﺳﻢ ‪ Drawing‬و ﻣﺸﺮوع ‪ Project‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﻴﻦ ﺑﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.New‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ Lesson_1‬أﻣﺎم اﻻﺳﻢ ‪) Name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(1‬‬

‫‪-3‬‬ ‫‪-4‬‬ ‫‪-5‬‬ ‫‪-6‬‬ ‫‪-7‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟـ ‪ Project and Drawing Location‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر هﻮ \‪) \Land Projects 2006‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (1‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Create Project‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Project Details‬ﻹدﺧﺎل ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Initial Settings for New Drawings‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر )‪ Default (Meters‬ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪) Prototype‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪.(2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Project Information‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ Project_1‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Name‬آﺎﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮوع )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(2‬‬ ‫ادﺧﻞ ‪ Project for Exploring Land Desktop Startup‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Description‬آﻮﺻﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮوع و ادﺧﻞ‬ ‫‪ Training‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Keywords‬آﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺮوع )أﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Drawing Path for this Project‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪) Project "DWG" Folder‬أﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(2‬‬

‫‪-7-‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.New Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Select Drawing Template‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻲ ‪ Browse‬و اذهﺐ إﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﻘﻮاﻟﺐ ‪ Template folder‬و‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎرﻩ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ هﻮ‪:‬‬ ‫‪C:\Program Files\Land Desktop 2006\Template‬‬ ‫و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻘﻮاﻟﺐ ‪ Template list‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) aec_m.dwt‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(1‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Project and Drawing Location‬ﺗﺄآﺪ أن ‪ Project Name‬ﺗﻌﺮض ‪ Project_1‬و أن ‪Drawing‬‬ ‫‪ Path‬هﻮ \‪) \Land Projects 2006\ Project_1\dwg‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(1‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻲ ‪ OK‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Setting Up the Point Database‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻢ آﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻀﻮاﺑﻂ ‪ Parameters‬ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺑﻌﺪ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺸﺮوع ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻮف ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Create Point Database‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‪ ،‬ﺗﺄآﺪ أن‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ أﻣﺎم ‪ Point Description Field Size‬هﻲ ‪ 32‬ﺣﺮف )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(3‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Use Point Names‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ أن اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ أﻣﺎم ‪ Point Name Field Size‬هﻲ ‪ 16‬ﺣﺮف )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(3‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪3‬‬ ‫‪-8-‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫إﻋﺪاد رﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪Setting Up the New Drawing‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻢ آﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻀﻮاﺑﻂ ‪ Parameters‬ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺳﻮف ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮاري ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ اﻹﻋﺪادات ‪ Load Settings‬ﻓﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر‬ ‫‪ Path‬هﻮ ‪) Program Files\Land Desktop 2006\Data\Setup‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(4‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪4‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Load a Drawing Setup Profile‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Profile Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ )‪m500.set (Metric, 1:500‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (4‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻲ ‪ View‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) View Drawing Setup Profile‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(5‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪5‬‬ ‫‪-9-‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﻓﻲ )ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (5‬أن ‪ Coordinate Zone‬و ‪ Text Style‬و ‪ Drawing Border‬ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺟﻮا ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﺮﺳﻢ آﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ‪ Load Settings‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Load‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪.m500 Profile‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Next‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار اﻟﻮﺣﺪات ‪ Units‬و ﺗﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﺣﺪات )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(6‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪6‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Next‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار اﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس ‪ Scale‬و اﻟﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(7‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻷﻓﻘﻲ ‪ Horizontal Scale‬ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ إدراج اﻟﻜﺘﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﻴﺔ ‪ (Block Insertion) Drawing Block‬و ﻣﻘﺎس اﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫‪ Text Size‬اﻟﺬي ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬أﻣﺎ اﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮأﺳﻲ ‪ Vertical Scale‬ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺪار اﻟﻤﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪Default Vertical‬‬ ‫‪ Exaggeration‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ و اﻟﻄﻮﻟﻴﺔ ‪ Profiles and Cross Sections‬اﻟﻤﻨﺸﺄة ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Civil Design‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Next‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار اﻟﻨﻄﺎق ‪) Zone‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(8‬‬ ‫‪- 10 -‬‬

By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez

Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials

8 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Available Coordinate Systems ‫ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬UTM, NAD 83 Datum ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Categories ‫ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬-7 .(8 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬UTM with NAD 83 Datum, Zone 11, Meter; Central Meridian 117d W .(9 ‫ و اﻟﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ إﻋﺪاداﺗﻪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Orientation ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار اﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ‬Next ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ‬-8

9 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Style Set Name ‫ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬،Text Style ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻨﺺ‬Next ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬-9 .(10 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬mleroy ‫ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻨﺺ‬Load ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬mleroy.stp

- 11 -

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪10‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Current Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) L100‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(10‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Next‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار اﻹﻃﺎر ‪) Border‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(11‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪11‬‬ ‫‪ -12‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Border Selection‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Scaled Block‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Browse‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Select a‬‬ ‫‪) Custom Block‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(11‬‬ ‫‪ -13‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ أﺧﺘﺮ ‪) pm_841x594.dwg‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (12‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Open‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار اﻹﻃﺎر‬ ‫‪.Border‬‬

‫‪- 12 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪12‬‬ ‫‪ -14‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Next‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار ﺣﻔﻆ اﻹﻋﺪادات ‪.Save Settings‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪13‬‬ ‫إذا آﻨﺖ ﺗﻮد ﺣﻔﻆ اﻹﻋﺪادات ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ ﻓﻲ رﺳﻮﻣﺎت ‪ Drawings‬أﺧﺮى‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﺳﻢ أﻣﺎم ‪ Profile Name‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Save‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(13‬‬ ‫‪ -15‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Finish‬ﻟﺘﻨﻬﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪.Drawing Setup‬‬ ‫‪ -16‬ﺳﻮف ﺗﻈﻬﺮ أﻣﺎﻣﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪادات اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرهﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪- 13 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪14‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض ﻣﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ‪Reviewing the Project Directory Structure‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻣﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ‪ Directory Structure‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ® ‪.Windows Explorer‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ® ‪ Windows Explorer‬و اذهﺐ إﻟﻲ ‪.Land Projects 2006‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬أﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ Land Projects 2006‬و اﺳﺘﻌﺮض ﻣﺠﻠﺪات اﻟﻤﺸﺎرﻳﻊ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺪاﺧﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬أﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ‪ Project_1‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات ﺑﺪاﺧﻠﻪ و اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻔﻆ آﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻷﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫آﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺗﺤﻔﻆ داﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ اﻟـ ‪ COGO‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت )‪ Microsoft® database (.mdb‬و اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻮي ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Point‬‬ ‫‪ Groups‬و ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪.Description Keys‬‬ ‫أﻣﺎ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DWG‬ﻓﻴﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎت ‪ Drawing‬و اﻟﺘﻲ هﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻬﺬا اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع و أﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ‪ .dfm‬و اﻟﺘﻲ هﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻮع ‪ ASCII text‬و ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ‪.Default Drawing Settings‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ اﻟـ ‪ SURVEY‬ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟـ ‪ Raw‬اﻟﻤﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﻴﺔ ‪ Data Collectors‬و ‪ Field Book‬و‬ ‫‪ Observation Database‬و ‪ ، Traverse Adjustment Files‬و ﻳﺒﻘﻰ هﺬا اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻓﺎرﻏﺎ إﻟﻰ أن ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪.Autodesk Survey‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات ‪ Folders‬ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ‪ Autodesk Land Desktop‬ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ ‪ Surfaces‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ DTM‬و اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ ALIGN‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟـ ‪ Alignments‬و اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ Lots‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟـ ‪ Parcels‬و اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ ER‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟـ ‪.Volumes‬‬ ‫و اﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات ‪ Folders‬ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ‪ Autodesk Civil Design‬ﻓﻴﻨﺸﺄ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ PIPEWKS‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫اﻟـ ‪ Pipes‬و اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ HD‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟـ ‪ Hydrology‬و اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ CD‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟـ ‪.Sheet Manager‬‬

‫‪- 14 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪ :‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ‪Lesson 2: Changing Project Settings‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺸﺮوع ﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻪ ﻣﻊ رﺳﻮﻣﺎت أﺧﺮى ﺛﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪد ﺣﻮاﺷﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة و آﻴﻔﻴﺔ إﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت و اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﺎت اﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺸﺮوع و إﻋﺎدة رﺑﻂ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ‪Copying a Project and Re-associating the Current Drawing‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻨﺴﺦ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع إﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﺮوع ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ أن ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و ﻟﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎت‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع و ﻟﺬا ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ أﺧﺮي ﻣﻦ هﺬا اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع‪.‬‬ ‫أﻳﻀﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ أي ﻣﺸﺮوع ﻧﺸﻂ أو اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ و ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺸﺮوع ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Land Desktop‬و ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺸﺮوع ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ رﺳﻢ أو ﻣﺸﺮوع ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ …‪ Project Mgr‬و اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﺧﻴﺎر اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ‪.Copy Option‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Project Manager‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Project Management‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Project‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Name‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Tutorial1‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Copy‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Copy‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(15‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪15‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Copy Project To‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ TutorialC‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(16‬‬

‫‪- 15 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪16‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ Building site - Northwest corner‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Description‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(16‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮخ ﻟﻪ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات و اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت آﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع اﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ رواﺑﻂ اﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎت إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(17‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪17‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Close‬ﻟﺘﻐﻠﻖ ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻮار اﻟـ ‪.Project Management‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪.Lesson-2.dwg‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،File‬اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ،TutorialC‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Lesson-2.dwg‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(18‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪18‬‬ ‫‪- 16 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪Changing Drawing Setup Parameters‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻘـﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻷﻓﻘﻲ و ﺳﺘﺮى آﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﺮ ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﻨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ هــﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﻘـﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻷﻓــــﻘﻲ هـــﻮ‬ ‫‪ ،1:500‬و وﺣﺪة ارﺗﻔﺎع اﻟﻨﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﻖ ‪ 2MM‬ﺗﺴﺎوي ‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪ ،‬و ﻣﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪ 1:500‬هﻮ ‪ 2‬و وﺣﺪات اﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‪ ،‬و ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ هﺬا أن ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻨﺺ ‪ 2MM‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﺑﺎرﺗﻔﺎع ‪ 2‬ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ Command Line‬اآﺘﺐ ‪ ST‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Text Style‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Style Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2MM‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟـ ‪ Font‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ 1‬أﻣﺎم اﻟـ ‪ Height‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Apply‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪Close‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(19‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪19‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ إﻟﻰ ‪.1:1000‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺧﺘﺮ‪ Drawing Setup‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Drawing Setup‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Scale‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Drawing Scale‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Horizontal‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 1:1000‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(20‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪20‬‬

‫‪- 17 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ Command Line‬اآﺘﺐ ‪ ST‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Text Style‬ﻣﺮة‬ ‫أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﺗﺄآﺪ أن اﻟـ ‪ Height‬ﻟﻠﻨﺴﻖ ‪ 2MM‬هﻮ ‪ 2‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Cancel‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(21‬‬ ‫إن ﻣﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻴﺎس ‪ 1:1000‬هﻮ ‪ 1‬و وﺣﺪات اﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ هﻲ اﻟﻤﻠﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﺳﻴﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ هﺬا ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﺴﻖ ‪ 2MM‬ﺑﺎرﺗﻔﺎع‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻨﺺ ﻣﻘﺪارﻩ ‪ ،2‬ﻣﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻨﺴﻖ اﻟﻨﺺ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻊ آﻞ أﻧﺴﺎق اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Land‬‬ ‫‪.Desktop‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪21‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ دﻗﺔ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ إﻟﻲ ‪.1‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Drawing Setup‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Drawing Setup‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،Units‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Display Precision‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Elevation‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ،1‬ﺛﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪Samples‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻨﻤﻮذج اﻟﻤﻌﺮوض )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(22‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪22‬‬ ‫إن هﺬا اﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ إدﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ إﺟﺮاؤﻩ و ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ اﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪- 18 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻷﺻﻞ و زاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺪوران ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Drawing Setup‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،Orientation‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Base Point‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫>>‪ Pick‬و اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ‪ Node Osnap‬ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ ‪.10‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺘﻘﺎط اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Drawing Setup‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪Northing and‬‬ ‫‪ Easting‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ 5000‬ﻟﻠـ ‪ Northing‬و ‪ 5000‬ﻟﻠـ ‪.Easting‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ North Rotation‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ 13.2450‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Angle‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(23‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪23‬‬ ‫‪ -12‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -13‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Utilities‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Symbol Manager‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Symbol Manager‬‬ ‫‪ -14‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ COGO Metric Symbols‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،Symbol Set‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Palette‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Details‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) North Arrow‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (24‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪24‬‬ ‫‪ -15‬ﺣﺪد ﻣﻜﺎن ﻟﻌﺮض اﺗﺠﺎﻩ اﻟﺸﻤﺎل ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ‪ Magnetic‬آﻮﺻﻒ ‪.Description‬‬ ‫‪- 19 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪25‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪Editing Drawing Settings‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﻐﻴﺮ اﻹﻋﺪادات ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬و ﺗﺤﻔﻆ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮات إﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻮذج ‪ Prototype‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة‬ ‫ﻓﻲ رﺳﻮﻣﺎت أﺧﺮى ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Drawing Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Edit Settings‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺗﺄآﺪ أن ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Program‬ﺗﻌﺮض ‪) Autodesk Land Desktop‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(26‬‬

‫‪-3‬‬ ‫‪-4‬‬ ‫‪-5‬‬ ‫‪-6‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪26‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Settings‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Geodetic Labels‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Edit Settings‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (26‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Geodetic Annotation Settings‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(27‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Line Annotation‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ‪ Az‬أزل ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪ Grid‬و ‪) Ground‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(27‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ‪ Suffix‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ m‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Grid‬و ‪ Ground‬و ‪) Geodetic‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(27‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ‪ Distance Unit‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ METERS‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Grid‬و ‪ Ground‬و ‪) Geodetic‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(27‬‬

‫‪- 20 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪27‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Edit Settings‬‬ ‫هﺬﻩ اﻹﻋﺪادات ‪ Settings‬ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﻤﻮذج ‪ Prototype‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫رﺳﻮﻣﺎت أﺧﺮى ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Selected Item‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Save to Prototype‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (26‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Select‬‬ ‫‪) Prototype‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(28‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪28‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Prototype‬أﺧﺘﺮ )‪) DEFAULT (METERS‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (28‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Edit Settings‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Close‬‬

‫‪- 21 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪ :‬اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Lesson 3: Working with Point Objects‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،Land Desktop‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ أو ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‪ ،‬و ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻞ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و آﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﻋﻠﻬﻢ ﻣﻊ أواﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﻇﻬﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺒﻬﺎ اﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ أو ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﻇﻬﺎرهﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب ﻣﺤﺪد و ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط إﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﺎرﺟﻴﺔ ‪ External Database‬و ﻟﻴﺲ داﺧﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﺪدهﺎ ‪ Markers‬و ﻧﺺ ‪ Text‬و آﻼهﻤﺎ ﻟﻪ ﻧﺴﻘـﻪ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻪ و اﻟﺬي ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬و ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أﻳﻀﺎ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Label‬ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟـ ‪.Label Style‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺎس ﻇﻬﻮر ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ Markers‬و اﻟﻨﺺ ‪ Text‬داﺧﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺔ ‪ Relative‬أو ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ أو ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪.Absolute‬‬ ‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﺺ ‪ Text‬و اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ Marker‬اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ ‪ ،Grip Editing‬و‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﻨﺸﺄ ﺳﻬﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ آﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ 29‬و ﻻﺣﻆ اﻟﻔﺮق ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 1‬و ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪.(2‬‬

‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪29‬‬ ‫وﺻﻒ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ Point Descriptions‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن ﺧﺎم ‪ Raw‬أو ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن آﺎﻣﻼ ‪ ) Full‬آﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ اﻟـ‬ ‫‪ Description Key‬ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻨﺺ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Layer‬آﻤﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت ‪ Marker‬و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪادات ‪Settings‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺮدة‪.‬‬ ‫إﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺎدﻳﻖ اﻟﺤﻮار داﺧﻞ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪهﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ هﻴﺌﺔ ‪ Northing/Easting‬أو‬ ‫‪ Easting/Northing‬أو ‪ X,Y‬أو ‪.Y,X‬‬ ‫أﻣﺮ ‪ UNDO‬و هﻮ إﺣﺪى أواﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺗﻨﺤﺎز أو ﺗﺼﻄﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎم ‪.World UCS‬‬

‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر ‪ C:\Land Projects 2006‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ TUTORIAL2‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lesson-3.dwg‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Listing Point Objects‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ هﻤﺎ ‪ 247‬و ‪ ،758‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم أﻣﺮ ‪ List‬و هﻮ إﺣﺪى أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪.247‬‬ ‫‪- 22 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ List‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 247‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(30‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪30‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻼﺣﻆ أن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﺒﺎرة ﻋﻦ آﺎﺋﻦ ‪ AECC_POINT‬و ﻟﻴﺴﺖ آﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟـ ‪ ،AutoCAD‬و إن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ اﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬آﻤﺎ أن إﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و وﺻﻔﻬﺎ و رﻗﻤﻬﺎ و اﺳﻤﻬﺎ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﻴﻦ داﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬أﻏﻠﻖ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة‪.‬‬ ‫إدراج ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Inserting Points from the Point Database‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ أو إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة داﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻤﺴﺢ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ‪ 247‬و ‪ 758‬و إﻋﺎدة إدراﺟﻬﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬اآﺘﺐ ‪ Erase‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ Command Line‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ‪ 247‬و ‪ 758‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Utilities‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Quick View‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪31‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ‪ X‬ﻓﻲ أﻣﺎآﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ إزاﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(31‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض آﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط داﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ List Points‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.List Points‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.List All Points‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬اﺳﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ‪ 247‬و ‪.758‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻼﺣﻆ أن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 247‬ﻣﻌﺮوﺿﺔ آـ ‪ 247L‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ أﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ أو ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ‪ Locked‬و ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮهﺎ ‪) Unlocked‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(32‬‬

‫‪- 23 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪32‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(33‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪33‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﺨﻄﻮة اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹدراج اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Insert Points to Drawing‬ﺛﻢ اآﺘﺐ ‪ W‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Window‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎن ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )ﺗﻘﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎن ﻓﻲ اﻟﻨﺼﻒ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻼﺣﻆ ﻇﻬﻮر اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎن ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(34‬‬

‫‪- 24 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪34‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Changing Point Elevations‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب اﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ إﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺪرﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Insert‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Insertion Elevation‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Fixed elevation‬و ﺗﺄآﺪ أن اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ أﻣﺎم ‪Fixed‬‬ ‫‪ Elevation‬هﻲ ‪) 0‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(35‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪35‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،Text‬و اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Automatic Leaders‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(36‬‬

‫‪- 25 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪36‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ List‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ ‪ 758‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫آﻤﺎ ﺗﺮى ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ 37‬ﻓﻤﺎزال اﻟـ ‪ Marker Location‬ﻳﻌﺮض ‪ ،245.51 m.‬ﻓﺈﻋﺪادات اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺠﺐ إﻋﺎدة إدراج هﺬﻩ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط أو إﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪37‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬أﻏﻠﻖ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹدراج اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎن ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Insert Points to Drawing‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Window‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ‪ 247‬و ‪ 758‬ﻹﻋﺎدة إدراﺟﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ Point in Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ‪) Replace All‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(38‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪38‬‬ ‫‪- 26 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -8‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ List‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 758‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫آﻤﺎ ﺗﺮى ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ 39‬ﻓﺎﻟـ ‪ Marker Location‬اﻵن ﻳﻌﺮض ‪.0 m.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪39‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬أﻏﻠﻖ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Changing Point Display Properties‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﻮف ﻧﻠﻘﻲ ﻧﻈﺮة ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ ‪ ،758‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﺔ ﻳﻤﻨﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺄرة )‪ (Right click with the mouse‬و اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪Display‬‬ ‫‪ Properties‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Display Properties‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Reset‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Point Elevation‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Reset Point Elevation in Drawing‬و أﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Actual Elevation‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(40‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪40‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ List‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ آﻼ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(41‬‬

‫‪- 27 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪41‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ 41‬ﺳﺘﻼﺣﻆ أن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 758‬أﺻﺒﺢ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ ‪ The Marker‬هﻮ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب اﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ و هﻮ ‪ 245.51 m.‬و أن‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 247‬ﻣﺎزال ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ ‪ ،0 m.‬إن اﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮات اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﻟﻌﺮض ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻮري و ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰم إﻋﺎدة إدراج‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬أﻏﻠﻖ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و اﻟﻨﺺ ‪Changing Point Markers and Text‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت أو اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﻤﺼﻤﻤﺔ داﺧﻞ اﻟـ ‪ ،AutoCAD‬ﻟﻮ ﻗﺮرت اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬آﻌﻼﻣﺎت‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت ‪ Marker Style‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﻣﺮ ‪.Ddptype‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﺨﺘﺎر ﻋﻼﻣﺔ أﺧﺮى و ﺗﺮآﺐ رﻣﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ ‪ 758‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Display Properties‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Display Properties‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Marker‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Custom Marker Symbol‬اﺧﺘﺮ رﻣﺰ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺮاﺑﻌﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ ‫‪ Superimposed‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة ‪) Circle Symbol‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Custom Marker Size‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Size in Absolute Units‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ 2‬أﻣﺎم اﻟـ ‪) Size‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(42‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪42‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻇﻬﻮر و ﻟﻮن رﻗﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب و أﻳﻀﺎ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪- 28 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻇﻬﻮر اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب و ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮن وﺻﻒ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ اﻟﻨﺺ إﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Text‬ﺛﻢ و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Color and Visibility‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم اﻟﺼﻒ ‪ Elevation‬و اﻟﻌﻤﻮد‬ ‫?‪) Visible‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(43‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻮن ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪ Description‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Select a Color‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻮن‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻮن ‪) Cyan‬أزرق ﻓﺎﺗﺢ( ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻷﻟﻮان اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ Standard Colors Palette‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Display Properties‬‬ ‫آﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أﻳﻀﺎ إدﺧﺎل رﻗﻢ اﻟﻠﻮن ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة ﻓﺈذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ 4‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻨﺪوق اﻟﻤﺠﺎور ﻟﺼﻨﺪوق اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻠﻮن ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻠﻮن إﻟﻲ اﻟﻠﻮن‬ ‫‪) Cyan‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(43‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪43‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Style and Size‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Absolute Units‬و ادﺧﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ 2‬أﻣﺎم اﻟـ ‪) Text Size‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (43‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫اﻧﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 758‬ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و ﻣﻘﺎس اﻟﻨﺺ ﻳﻈﻬﺮان ﺑﺤﺠﻢ أﺻﻐﺮ و أن رﻗﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 247‬ﻣﺎزاﻟﺖ آﻤﺎ هﻲ ﺑﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻣﻘﺎس اﻟﻨﺺ و اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻄﺎن ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪.(44‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪44‬‬

‫‪- 29 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫آﻠﻤﺎ ﺻﻐﺮت أو آﺒﺮت اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Zoom in or out‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن ﻣﻘﺎس اﻟﻨﺺ و ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮان ﺑﺘﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻳﺠﺐ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Regen‬إن‬ ‫آﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ و اﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺒﻜﺮة اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺄرة ‪.(Mouse Scroll‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Preferences‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Point Display‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪Always Regenerate‬‬ ‫‪ Point Display After Zoom‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(45‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪45‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ اآﺘﺐ ‪ Regen‬ﻹﻋﺎدة ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻵن ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن ﻣﻘﺎس اﻟﻨﺺ و اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 247‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮان ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Regen‬و ﻟﻴﺲ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 758‬ﺗﺒﻘﻲ آﻤﺎ هﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺳﻬﺎ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ‪.Absolute Size‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮ آﺎﻧﺖ آﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط أو ﻋﺪد آﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ Absolute Size‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮض ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ و ﻧﺼﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻔﻀﻞ ﻏﻠﻖ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ Always Regenerate Point Display After Zoom‬آﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ أداء أﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻌﺮض‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪Point Marker‬‬ ‫‪ -12‬أﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ ‪ 247‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﺎﺑﺾ اﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ‪.Grips‬‬ ‫‪ -13‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺾ ﻧﺤﻮ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺠﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر ﺳﻬﻢ آﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﺺ و اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(46‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪46‬‬ ‫‪- 30 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪Controlling Point Display by Layer‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ The Point Layer‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ‪ Turn Off‬هﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ ‪ 247‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ أﻣﺎﻣﻚ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Edit Object Display‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Object Display‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(47‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪47‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (47‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Select Layer‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Layer‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) PNT_MISC‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (48‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Object‬‬ ‫‪ Display‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪48‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻷدوات ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Layer Properties Manager‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪) PNT_MISC‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (49‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﻐﻠﻖ اﻟـ ‪.Layer Properties Manager‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪49‬‬ ‫‪- 31 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ‪ :‬إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ‪Lesson 4:Creating Points‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﺘﺘﻌﻠﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻳﺪوﻳﺎ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻲ اﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻲ و اﻟﺸﺮﻗﻲ ‪ Northing and Easting‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ ‫‪ Alignment‬أو ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﻢ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ ،Surface Features‬و أﻳﻀﺎ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أواﻣﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ و ﻏﻠﻖ ‪ Lock‬اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و اآﺘﺸﺎف‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻌﺎرض ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر ‪ C:\Land Projects 2006‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ TUTORIAL2‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lesson-4.dwg‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻳﺪوﻳﺎ ‪Creating Points Manually‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ رﻗﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ ﻳﺪوﻳﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Create‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Numbering‬أدﺧﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ 10‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Current number‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(50‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪50‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟـ ‪ Elevations‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Manual‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ و ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ ‪.249 m.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Manual‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ 249‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺴﻮب ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟـ ‪ Descriptions‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Manual‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(51‬‬ ‫‪- 32 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪51‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي و ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب ‪ 249 m.‬و ﺑﻮﺻﻒ هﻮ ‪.BLDG‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Manual‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -12‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ BLDG‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ و ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺴﻮب اﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ‪ 249 m.‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(52‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪52‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب و وﺻﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪Specifying Automatic Elevations and Descriptions‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﺴﺘﻜﻤﻞ إدراج اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﻤﻨﺴﻮب و وﺻﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Create‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟـ ‪ Elevation‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Automatic‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ اﻟـ ‪ Descriptions‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Automatic‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(53‬‬

‫‪- 33 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪53‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻟﻠﻤﺒﻨﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب ‪ 249‬و ﺑﻮﺻﻒ ‪.BLDG‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Manual‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إدراج اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻟﻤﺤﺪد ﺑﻤﻨﺴﻮب ‪ 249 m.‬و ﺑﻮﺻﻒ ‪ BLDG‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(54‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪54‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط داﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ‪Creating Points in the Points Database‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻐﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻧﻘﺎط داﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت دون إدراﺟﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﺊ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Create‬و ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺴﻢ ‪ Numbering‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪ Insert to Drawing as Created‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(55‬‬ ‫‪- 34 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪55‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ رآﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Manual‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪ ،‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎدة اﻹﻋﺪادات ﻟﻴﺘﻢ إدراج اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﻠﺮﺳﻢ‪ ،‬و إدراج ﺁﺧﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪56‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Create‬و ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺴﻢ ‪ Numbering‬اﺧﺘﺮ‪ Insert to Drawing as Created‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(55‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Insert Points to Drawing‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ N‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Number‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ 13‬ﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺠﺪ اﻵن أن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(57‬‬

‫‪- 35 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪57‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ آﺎﺋﻦ ‪Placing Points on an Object‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮآﻨﻴﻦ اﻟﺒﺎﻗﻴﺎن ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Automatic‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﻌﻤﻮدي اﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺒﻨﻲ ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(58‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪58‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎن ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ و اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪Placing Points Along an Alignment‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪ Alignment‬ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻄﺎت ‪ Stations‬ﻣﺤﺪدة و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎت ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،Offset‬أوﻻ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺛﻢ أﺧﺘﺮ اﻟـ ‪ Alignment‬اﻟﻨﺸﻂ أو اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪- 36 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignment‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Alignment‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪.Alignment Librarian‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟـ ‪ Selection‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ P3_HWY69‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(59‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪59‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Points – Alignments‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Measure Alignment‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ 15500‬ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪء ‪ Beginning Station‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ 16000‬ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪.Ending Station‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ 15‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎت اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ‪ ،Offset‬و ادﺧﻞ ‪ 50‬ﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت ‪ Station Interval‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ 25‬ﻟﺮﻗﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺮي ‪ 11‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ أﻧﺸﺌﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(60‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪60‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ‪Placing Points on a Surface‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻷرض اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻧﻤﻮذج ﺷﺒﻜﻲ ﻟﻤﻮاﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ EG‬و ﺟﻌﻠﻪ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪- 37 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Select Surface‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select surface to open‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ EG‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(60‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪61‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Points – Surface‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.On Grid‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ )و هﻲ ‪ (0‬ﻟﺪوران اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Intersection Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ 50‬آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎت اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ (Grid X Spacing) X‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ )‪(50‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎت اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪.(Grid Y spacing) Y‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Intersection Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ No‬ﻟـ ‪ Change the size or rotation of the grid/grid squares‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎس اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ أو زاوﻳﺔ دوراﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة ﺑﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺒﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(62‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪62‬‬ ‫‪- 38 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Lesson5: Editing Points‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Point Editing‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ أرﻗﺎم اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و إﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎﺗﻬﺎ و اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر ‪ C:\Land Projects 2006‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ TUTORIAL2‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lesson-5.dwg‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ‪Selecting Points to Edit‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪OK‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Points‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Edit‬‬ ‫‪.Points‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Enable Filtering‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(63‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Include‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(63‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ With Number Matching‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Selection Set in Drawing‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(63‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ W‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺧﻴﺎر اﻟـ ‪ Window‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺜﻼث ﻧﻘﺎط ‪ 247‬و ‪ 248‬و ‪ 758‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪63‬‬

‫‪- 39 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Edit Points‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪ ،‬ﺗﺄآﺪ أن اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺜﻼث ﻳﻈﻬﺮوا اﻵن داﺧﻞ اﻟﺨﺎﻧﺔ أﻣﺎم ‪With Number‬‬ ‫‪) Matching‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(64‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪64‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Build List‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (64‬ﻟﺘﺒﻨﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎرة ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Edit‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(65‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪65‬‬ ‫‪- 40 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ ‪ 247‬ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ ‪ Locked‬و ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ‪ ،‬و ﻟﻜﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﺎن اﻷﺧﺮﻳﺎن ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﻤﺎ‪ ،‬و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﺘﺨﺮج ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Edit Points‬ﻹزاﻟﺔ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪ Unlock‬ﻋﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪.247‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار‪.‬‬ ‫إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Unlocking Points‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﺰﻳﻞ اﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪ Unlock‬ﻋﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 247‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ و ﻗﻴﻤﺔ اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻲ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪.X‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Lock/Unlock Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Unlock Points‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ S‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Selection‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ ‪ 247‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ ‪ 247‬اﻵن ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ و ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Points‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Points‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Edit‬‬ ‫‪. Points‬‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎرة ﺳﺘﻌﺮض ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ و ﻗﻴﻤﺔ اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻲ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ X‬ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪.247‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Edit‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 247‬و ﺗﺤﺖ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ‪ Raw Desc‬ادﺧﻞ ‪) MON‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(66‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺗﺤﺖ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ‪ Easting‬ﻟﻨﻔﺲ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ أدﺧﻞ ‪) 274101.6448‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(66‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪66‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ ‪ 247‬اﻵن ﻟﻬﺎ وﺻﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ و ﺗﺤﺮآﺖ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻴﺴﺎر ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 20‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻬﺎ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(67‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪67‬‬

‫‪- 41 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Editing Point Datum‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 100‬و ‪ 200‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎرة ‪ 100‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Edit Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Datum‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ 100‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ D‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Dialog‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Points‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪) Enable Filtering‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(68‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Reset‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ﻟﺘﻤﺤﻮ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ و ﺗﺨﺘﺎر ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(68‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Point Groups‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(68‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ Point Groups‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ DAY2‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Build List‬ﻓﻲ أﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(68‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪68‬‬ ‫اﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج ﻓﻘﻂ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 100‬و ‪ 200‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Exclude‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺜﻨﻲ آﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﻨﻄﺎق‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،Exclude‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ With Elevation Matching‬و ﻓﻲ اﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ اآﺘﺐ ‪.<100,>200‬‬ ‫هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﻌﺎدﻟﺔ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ 100‬ﻣﺘﺮ و ﻓﻮق ‪ 200‬ﻣﺘﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(69‬‬

‫‪- 42 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪69‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Build List‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺜﻨﻲ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار‪.‬‬ ‫آﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎق اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ ﻣﻦ ‪ 100‬إﻟﻰ ‪ 200‬ﺗﻢ رﻓﻊ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ ‪ 100‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪Editing Points with AutoCAD Commands AutoCAD‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪا اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ MOVE‬و ‪ ROTATE‬و ‪ ،ALIGN‬أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪AutoCAD‬‬ ‫هﺬﻩ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ إن ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻔﻌﻴﻠﻬﺎ داﺧﻞ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪ Alignment‬و ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ ،Move‬و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﻢ أوﻻ ﺑﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ‬ ‫‪ AutoCAD‬ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Update‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ AutoCAD MOVE command‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Allow Points to be MOVE'd in‬‬ ‫‪ Drawing‬و أﻳﻀﺎ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Update Point Database After MOVE Command‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪.(70‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪70‬‬ ‫‪- 43 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪ Alignment‬و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬إن اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪ Layers‬اﻷﺧﺮى ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ أو ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ Locked‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﻬﻞ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺨﻂ و ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪.window selection set‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ اآﺘﺐ ‪ ،Move‬و اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﺧﻴﺎر اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺎر اﻟﺨﻂ ذو ﻟﻮن اﻟﺼﺪأ ‪ Rust‬و ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﺨﻂ أﻳﻀﺎ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.Enter‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Node Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 101‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮن ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻷﺳﺎس ‪ Base Point‬ﺛﻢ و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Node Osnap‬ﻣﺮة‬ ‫أﺧﺮى اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 102‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻤﺮاد اﻟﺘﺤﺮك إﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ اﻟﺨﻂ و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﻪ آﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺑﺈﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(71‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪71‬‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Using Check Points‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم أﺣﺪ أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬و هﻮ أﻣﺮ ‪ Undo‬ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎع اﻟﺨﻂ و ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻪ إﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﻤﺎ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ و ﻟﻜﻦ هﺬا اﻷﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﻟﺬﻟﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Check Points‬ﻟﺤﻞ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻨﺎﻗﺾ ﺑﻴﻦ إﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫و إﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ادﺧﻞ ‪ Undo‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز و ﻧﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻬﻤﺎ‬ ‫اﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Check Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ Modify Project‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪.Modify Project Database Points from Drawing‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Scan Drawing for‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) COGO Point Objects‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(72‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Modify Project Database‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Change points in project database‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(72‬‬

‫‪- 44 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪72‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪.Command Line‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض اﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ أﻓﻀﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ‪ F2‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻠـ ‪) AutoCAD‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(73‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪73‬‬

‫‪- 45 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎدس‪ :‬اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Lesson 6: Working with Point Groups‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ Point Group Manager‬ﻟﺘﻜﻮن ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻨﺎء اﻷﺳﻄﺢ و ﻣﻬﺎم أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر ‪ C:\Land Projects 2006‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ TUTORIAL2‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lesson-6.dwg‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ‪Creating a Point Group‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻨﺎء ﺳﻄﺢ و اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺢ ‪ Day2‬و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺠﺐ‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﺮوﺑﻴﺮ ‪ Benchmarks‬و ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﺪوران اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ‪.Temporary Turning Points‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Point Management‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ Point Group Manager‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻌﺮض ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫اﻵن ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع و اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﺨﺘﺎرة ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ DAY2‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺰر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Copy Point Group‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Create Point Group‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(74‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪74‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ DAY2-DTM‬ﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Group Name‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Exclude‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(75‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) With Raw Desc Matching‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(75‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ 92,93,94,95,96‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ ‪) Description‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(75‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Apply‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺜﻨﻲ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎرة ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(75‬‬ ‫و ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﻴﺴﺘﺜﻨﻰ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺮادﻩ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(75‬‬

‫‪- 46 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪75‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة ﻗﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﺖ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Point Group Manager‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ ‫اﻷﺧﺮى ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺳﺘﺠﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة داﺧﻞ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(76‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪76‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪Creating a Point Group Using the Raw Desc‬‬ ‫‪Matching Tab‬‬ ‫إن ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Create Point Group‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻪ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Raw Desc Matching‬و اﻟﺬي ﻳﻤﻜﻦ أن ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺻﻔﻬﺎ‪ ،‬و اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة و اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻢ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪ Description Code‬ﻣﺆﺳﺴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪Description‬‬ ‫‪ Key Codes‬اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺮوع‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Raw Desc Matching‬اﻟﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ و ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر وﺻﻒ ﻳﺤﺘﻮي‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ رﻣﻮز ﺷﺎذة ‪.Wildcards‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Borehole‬و اﻟﺘﻲ وﺻﻔﻬﺎ هﻮ "‪."12‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ اﻟـ ‪ ،Point Group Manager‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪) Create Point Group icon‬أول أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ(‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (77‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Create Point Group‬‬

‫‪- 47 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪77‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬أﻣﺎم اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Group Name‬ادﺧﻞ ‪) Borehole‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(78‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Raw Desc Matching‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ "‪) "12‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(78‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪78‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Apply‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪.Point List‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫اﻵن و ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮم اﻵن ﺑﻘﻔﻞ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Borehole‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮف ﻓﻮق اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Borehole‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lock Point Group‬‬ ‫‪.Properties‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ أن اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ ‪) Locked‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(79‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪79‬‬

‫‪- 48 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻟﻬﻴﻤﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Applying Overrides to Point Groups‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻟﻬﻴﻤﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ‪ Point Group‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪد وﺻﻒ واﺣﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻓﻮق ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ Control‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Properties‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Point Group Properties‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(80‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) Overrides‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(80‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Description‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ داﺧﻞ اﻟﺨﻠﻴﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(80‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ Control Point‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﻤﻬﻴﻤﻦ ‪) Description override‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(80‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪80‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫أﺻﺒﺢ اﻵن وﺻﻒ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Control‬هﻮ ‪.Control Point‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺮوج ﻣﻦ ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.View‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫اﻵن ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈدراج ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Control‬إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Insert‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Point Labeling‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ‪Use the Current Point Label Style When‬‬ ‫‪ Inserting Points‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(81‬‬

‫‪- 49 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪81‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Insert Points to Drawing‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ G‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪.Group‬‬ ‫‪ -12‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Select a Point Group‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(82‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪82‬‬ ‫‪ -13‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Control‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (82‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -14‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ Point in Drawing‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Replace ALL‬‬ ‫أﺻﺒﺢ وﺻﻒ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻵن هﻮ ‪ Control Point‬آﻤﺎ هﻴﻤﻦ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(83‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪83‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت أﺧﺮى إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺘﻠﻚ اﻟﻬﻴﻤﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪- 50 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Updating Point Groups‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺤﺬف ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ أآﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ‪Show Changes to All Point Groups‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮات اﻟﺘﻲ ﻃﺮأت ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﺛﻬﺎ ﻟﺤﺬف اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺤﺬوﻓﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.Preferences‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Point Group Manager‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪.Check Status on Startup‬‬ ‫هﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻳﻜﺘﺸﻒ و ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮا ﻋﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط إذا ﺣﺪث ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Erase‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ N‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪.Numbers‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ 1020‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺤﺬف اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ ‪.1020‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Management‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ أن هﻨﺎك ﺛﻼث ﻣﻦ أرﺑﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت )‪ Borehole‬و ‪ Day2‬و ‪ (Day2-DTM‬ﻟﻬﻢ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻴﺮ إﻟﻰ أﻧﻬﻢ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺟﻮا إﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ‪) out-of-date‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،(84‬ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ إﻟﻰ أن ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ‪ out-of-date‬ﻷﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮي ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪84‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪) Show Changes to All Point Groups‬ﺛﺎﻟﺚ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ( )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(84‬‬ ‫إن ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Point Group Manager‬ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮات ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺛﻢ ﻳﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Changed Point‬‬ ‫‪) Groups‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(85‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪85‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ‪ Add/Remove‬ﻳﺤﺪد ﻣﺎ هﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮب ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﻳﺤﻮي ‪ Remove‬ﻷن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 1020‬ﻟﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع و ﻳﺠﺐ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ )‪) Update Point Group(s‬أول أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ( )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(85‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﺳﻴﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Point Group Manager‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ أن اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻴﻦ )‪ Day2‬و ‪ (Day2-DTM‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻢ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﺗﺪل ﻋﻠﻰ أﻧﻬﻢ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺟﺎن إﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ‪ out-of-date‬و ﻟﻜﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Borehole‬ﻣﺎزاﻟﺖ ﺗﻌﺮض هﺬﻩ اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‪ .‬هﺬا ﻷن هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻘﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ و ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪.Borehole‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺰر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮق اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Borehole‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Unlock Point Group Properties‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻼﺣﻆ أن أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻗﺪ اﺧﺘﻔﺖ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪.Borehole‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺰر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻓﻮق اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ Borehole‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Update‬أو اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺮاﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ آﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺳﻮﻳﺎ( )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(86‬‬ ‫‪ -12‬أﻏﻠﻖ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Group Manager‬‬ ‫‪- 51 -‬‬

By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez

Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials

86 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬

- 52 -

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪Organizing Points by Descriptions‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪ Description Keys‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻤﺔ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﺨﺎم ‪ Raw Descriptions‬اﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮظ داﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ ‫‪ Point Database‬إﻟﻰ وﺻﻒ آﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Full Description‬ﻟﺘﺨﺼﺺ رﻣﻮز ﻣﻊ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و اﻟﺮﻣﻮز‬ ‫أﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر ‪ C:\Land Projects 2006‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ TUTORIAL2‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lesson-7.dwg‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ ‪Creating a Description Key File‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ‪ ،‬أوﻻ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎر اﻟﺮﻣﻮز ‪ Symbol‬ﻟﻠﻜﺘﻠﺔ ‪ Block‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إدراﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪدة ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Insert‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Search Path for Symbol Block Drawing Files‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Browse‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Browse for Folder‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select a Path‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Autodesk Land Desktop‬‬ ‫\‪2006\R16.2\Data\Symbol Manager\Cogo_metric‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر ﻳﺠﺐ أوﻻ أن ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ إﺧﻔﺎء اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت و اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪات ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫®‪ Windows‬و ﻟﺘﻔﻌﻞ ذﻟﻚ اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Start‬ﺛﻢ أﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Control Panel‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Control Panel‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Folder Options‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Folder Options‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ View‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Advanced Settings‬اذهﺐ إﻟﻰ ‪ Hidden files and folders‬و اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Show‬‬ ‫‪) hidden files and folders‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(87‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪87‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Settings‬‬ ‫‪- 53 -‬‬

By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez

Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials

Use the Current Point Label Style When Inserting Points ‫ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬Point Labeling ‫ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ‬-7 .(88 ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬

88 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ Match on ‫ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬Matching Options ‫ و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬Description Keys ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬-8 .(89 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Description Parameters ($1, $2, etc.)

89 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ Description Key Manager ‫ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Point Management ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Points ‫ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬-9 .Description Key Manager ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ .(90 ‫ )أول أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ( )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Create DescKey File ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬-10

- 54 -

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪90‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Create Description Key File‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(91‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ CREW-B‬أﻣﺎم اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪) DescKey File name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (91‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Description Key Manager‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪91‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ ‪Creating Description Keys‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ وﺻﻒ ‪ Create Description Keys‬ﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺮﺻﻴﻒ و اﻟﻘﻀﺒﺎن اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ و اﻷﺷﺠﺎر‬ ‫داﺧﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ أن أﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺔ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻷﺣﺮف ‪ case-sensitive‬ﻓﻤﺜﻼ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪TREE‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪ Tree‬و آﻼهﻤﺎ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪.tree‬‬ ‫أوﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ ﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺮﺻﻴﻒ ‪.Edge of Pavement‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ CREW-B‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪) Create DescKey‬اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ( )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(92‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪92‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ EP‬أﻣﺎم ‪ ،DescKey Code‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ General‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ EP‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Description Format‬و أدﺧﻞ‬ ‫‪ PNT_EP‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Point Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(93‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Symbol Insertion‬ﺗﺄآﺪ أن ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Symbol Block Name‬ﺗﻌﺮض >‪ <none‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع‬ ‫إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Description Key Manager‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(93‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪93‬‬ ‫‪- 55 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ ﻟﻠﻘﻀﺒﺎن اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪﻳﺔ ‪.Iron Bar‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Create DescKey‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Create Description Key dialog‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ IB‬أﻣﺎم ‪ ،DescKey Code‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ General‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ IB‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Description Format‬و أدﺧﻞ‬ ‫‪ PNT_IB‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Point Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(94‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Symbol Insertion‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Symbol Block Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ bound‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ MONUMENT‬أﻣﺎم‬ ‫‪) Symbol Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(94‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪94‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Scale/Rotate Symbol‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Scale Symbol By‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪Current Dwg‬‬ ‫‪) Scale: 1:1000‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(95‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Apply Scale To‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪) X-Y Dimensions‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (95‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Description Key Manager‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪95‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح وﺻﻒ ﻟﻸﺷﺠﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Create DescKey‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Create Description Key dialog‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ Tree‬أﻣﺎم ‪ ،DescKey Code‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ General‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ $2mm $1 Tree‬أﻣﺎم ‪Description‬‬ ‫‪ Format‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ PNT_TREE‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Point Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(96‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬إن هﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪ $2mm $1 Tree‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ ‪ ،Description Parameters‬و هﻲ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻋﺎدة‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﺺ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺪﺧﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮات ﻻﺣﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻞ اﻷﺷﺠﺎر ﻓﺒﺈدﺧﺎل ‪ Tree Maple 120‬آﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺳﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﻮاﻧﻬﺎ ‪.120 mm Maple Tree.‬‬

‫‪- 56 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -11‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Symbol Insertion‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Symbol Block Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ tree‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ TREE‬أﻣﺎم ‪Symbol‬‬ ‫‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(96‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪96‬‬ ‫‪ -12‬أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Scale/Rotate Symbol‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Scale Symbol By‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Description Parameter‬‬ ‫و أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ $‬و أزل اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪) Current Drawing Scale: 1:1000‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(97‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪97‬‬ ‫‪ -13‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Description Key Manager‬ﺛﻢ أﻏﻠﻖ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Description‬‬ ‫‪.Key Manager‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ اﻵن ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺛﻼث ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان ‪Creating a Label Style‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ‪ Labels‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ ‪ Description Keys‬دون اﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ إﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ اﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ ‪ Labels‬ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Edit Label Styles‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‪.Edit Label Styles‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Point Label Styles‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) active desckeys only‬ﻻﺣﻆ اﻧﻪ ﺑﻤﺠﺮد إﺗﻤﺎم‬ ‫اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺤﻮ اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ (Text‬ﻓﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻘﺴﻢ ‪ Text‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻪ أي ﻧﺼﻮص )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(98‬‬

‫‪- 57 -‬‬

By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez

Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials

98 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .(99 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Name ‫ أﻣﺎم‬DescKey Only - Crew-B ‫ أدﺧﻞ‬-3 ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬DescKey file ‫ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬DescKey Matching On ‫ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬Description Keys ‫ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬-4 .(99 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬CREW-B .(99 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Insert DescKey Symbol ‫ و‬Substitute DescKey Description ‫ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر آﻼ ﻣﻦ‬-5

99 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .OK ‫ ﺛﻢ‬Save ‫ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬-6

- 58 -

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫إدراج ﻧﻘﺎط ﺑﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ وﺻﻒ ‪Inserting Points with Description Keys‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‪ ،‬أوﻻ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Label Style‬اﻟﻨﺸﻂ إﻟﻰ ‪.DescKey Only- Crew-B‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Label Settings‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Point Labels‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Label Style‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ DescKey Only - Crew-B‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.OK‬‬ ‫اﻵن ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻘﺎط ﻳﺪوﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﻟﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﺬي أﻧﺸﺄﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮاﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﻣﻨﺎﺳﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻲء اﻟﻬﺎم هﻨﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Create Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ أﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Manual‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺣﺪد أي ﻣﻜﺎن ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻷوﻟﻰ ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ EP‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ ‪) Description‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(100‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﺣﺪد أﻳﻀﺎ أي ﻣﻜﺎن ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ و أدﺧﻞ ‪ IB‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(100‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﺣﺪد ﻣﻜﺎن ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و أدﺧﻞ ‪ Tree Maple 120‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(100‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﺣﺪد ﻣﻜﺎن ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺮاﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و أدﺧﻞ ‪ Tree Oak 300‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(100‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻘﻮم اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻃﺒﻘﺎت ‪ Layers‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ إذا ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة داﺧﻞ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﻴﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎت ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫‪.Description Key Definitions‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪100‬‬

‫‪- 59 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ‪ :‬اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ ASCII‬اﻟﻨﺼﻲ ‪Lesson 8: Importing Points from an ASCII Text File‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ اﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ هﻴﺌﺎت ﻣﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﻘﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺮوع‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ هﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ هﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء هﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﺼﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮع ‪ ASCII‬و ﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻨﻘﺎط إﻟﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر ‪ C:\Land Projects 2006‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ TUTORIAL2‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lesson-8.dwg‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء هﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﺎط ‪Creating a Point File Format‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء هﻴﺌﺔ ‪ Format‬ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ هﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﺮاد اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻣﻨﻪ‪ ،‬و ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻴﻜﻮن‬ ‫اﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ آﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ Northing :‬ﺛﻢ ‪ Easting‬ﺛﻢ ‪ Elevation‬ﺛﻢ ‪.Description‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Import/Export Points‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Format Manager‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Format Manager‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(101‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪101‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Add‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Format Manager - Select Format Type‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(102‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) User Point File‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (102‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Point File‬‬ ‫‪.Format‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪102‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ Tutorial‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Format Name‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﻣﺘﺪاد اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Default Extension‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ .txt‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ !‬ ‫)ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﻌﺠﺐ ‪ (Exclamation Point‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Comment Tag‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(103‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺮك ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻻﻣﺘﺪاد اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Default Extension‬ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ اﻣﺘﺪاد اﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪- 60 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -5‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Delimited By‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﺨﺎﻧﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ‪ Delimited By‬ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ أي ﻧﺺ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(103‬‬ ‫هﺬا ﻳﻌﻨﻲ أن هﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻮاﺻﻞ و هﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎت ‪ ،Space Delimited‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ هﺬا اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ آﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎء ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن‬ ‫اﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ‪ Comma‬أو أي ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ ‪ Punctuation‬آﻔﺎﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Load‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Select Source File‬ﺛﻢ اذهﺐ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪\Land Projects 2006\Tutorial2\Survey‬‬ ‫و اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ Topo_pnt.txt‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Open‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻷﺳﻄﺮ اﻷوﻟﻰ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(103‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪103‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪد ﻧﻮع اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﻤﻮد ﻟﻴﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ هﻴﺌﺔ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أول >‪ <unused‬رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺎر )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (102‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ‪Format Manager -‬‬ ‫‪) Select Column Name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(104‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ أﻣﺎم ‪ Column Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Northing‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Point File‬‬ ‫‪) Format‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(104‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪104‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <unused‬ﻓﻲ رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Format Manager - Select Column‬‬ ‫‪.Name‬‬ ‫‪- 61 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -10‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Easting‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point File Format‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <unused‬ﻓﻲ رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Format Manager - Select Column‬‬ ‫‪.Name‬‬ ‫‪ -12‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Elevation‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point File Format‬‬ ‫‪ -13‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <unused‬ﻓﻲ رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Format Manager - Select Column‬‬ ‫‪.Name‬‬ ‫‪ -14‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Description‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point File Format‬‬ ‫‪ -15‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Parse‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺗﺤﺖ اﻷﻋﻤﺪة اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪة )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(105‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪105‬‬ ‫‪ -16‬ﺗﺼﻔﺢ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت و ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻬﻴﺌﺔ ‪ Format‬اﻟﺬي أﻧﺸﺄﺗﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت داﺧﻞ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -17‬أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ‪ Format Manager‬و ﺗﺄآﺪ أن اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ Tutorial‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(106‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪106‬‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺬا ﺗﻜﻮن ﻗﺪ أﻧﻬﻴﺖ ﺧﻄﻮات إﻋﺪاد هﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط ﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﻠﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬

‫‪- 62 -‬‬

By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez

Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials

Importing an ASCII Text Point File ‫ ﻧﺼﻲ‬ASCII ‫اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﻘﺎط‬ .‫ إﻟﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و اﻟﺮﺳﻢ أﻳﻀﺎ‬ASCII ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬Import Options ‫ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Import/Export Points ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Points ‫ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬-1 .COGO Database Import Options ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ Use ‫ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬What to do when point numbers need to be assigned to the points ‫ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم‬-2 .(107 ‫ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬next point number

107 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬Import Points ‫ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Import/Export Points ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Points ‫ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬-3 .Format Manager - Import Points ‫اﻟﺤﻮار‬ .(108 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬:‫ هﻮ‬Source File ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ أن‬Tutorial ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Format ‫ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬-4 \Land Projects 2006\Tutorial2\Survey\Topo_pnt.txt.

Create New Point ‫( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻷﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ‬108 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Add Points to Point Group ‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬-5 .Format Manager - Create Group ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬Group

108 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ Format ‫ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬OK ‫( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬109 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Name ‫ أﻣﺎم‬Topo_Area1 ‫ أدﺧﻞ‬-6 COGO Database Import ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Manager - Import Points .Options

109 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ - 63 -

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -7‬أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﻐﻠﻖ ‪ COGO Database Import Options‬و ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت و إدراﺟﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(110‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪110‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Points‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ List Points‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.List Points‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪) Enable Filtering‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(111‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Reset‬ﻟﺘﻤﺤﻮ اﺧﺘﻴﺎرك اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(111‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪111‬‬ ‫‪- 64 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -12‬أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Point Groups‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ Topo_Area1‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) List‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪.(112‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪112‬‬ ‫‪ -13‬ﺑﻌﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬

‫‪- 65 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت و اﻷﺷﻜﺎل اﻟﺤﻠﺰوﻧﻴﺔ و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Lesson 9: Labeling Lines, Curves,‬‬ ‫‪Spirals and Points‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت و اﻷﺷﻜﺎل اﻟﺤﻠﺰوﻧﻴﺔ و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﺘﻀﻴﻒ اﻟﺤﻮاﺷﻲ إﻟﻰ رﺳﻤﻚ ﻣﺜﻞ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ و اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ و أﻧﺼﺎف‬ ‫اﻷﻗﻄﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر ‪ C:\Land Projects 2006‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ TUTORIAL1‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lesson-9.dwg‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪Changing Label Settings‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﺤﺪد إﻋﺪادات ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Label Settings‬اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Label Settings‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ General‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪) Update Labels When Objects Change‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(113‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Update Labels When Objects Change‬ﻓﺈن اﻟﻌﻨﺎوﻳﻦ اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮآﺔ ‪ Dynamic Labels‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ‪ Object‬اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪113‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Line Labels‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Label Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪direction above, distance‬‬ ‫‪) below‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(114‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Forced Bearings‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) North‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(114‬‬

‫‪- 66 -‬‬

By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez

Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials

114 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ stacked above - radius, ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Current Label Style ‫ و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬Curve Labels ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬-5 .(115 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬length, tan, delta

115 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫( ﺛﻢ‬116 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬all point data ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Current Label Style ‫ و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬Point Labels ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬-6 .OK ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬

116 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬

- 67 -

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Labeling Lines and Points‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻌﺰل اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺘﻴﻦ ‪ Boundary‬و ‪ Pnt_control‬و ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺧﻂ اﻟـ ‪ Boundary‬و ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪Control‬‬ ‫‪.Points‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ادﺧﻞ ‪ LAI‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﺤﺪود اﻷزرق و أي ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﻟﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (117‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ ،Layer(s) to isolate‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺳﻢ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺘﻴﻦ أﻣﺎم اﻟﺨﺎﻧﺔ ‪Enter Item‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (118‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪117‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪118‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Layer Properties Manager‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻷدوات ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Layer Manager‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Boundary_label‬و ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرهﺎ آﺎﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪) Current Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (119‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.OK‬‬

‫‪- 68 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪119‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Add Static Labels‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺤﺪود اﻟﺰرﻗﺎء و اﻟﺴﺖ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(120‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪120‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Label‬إﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ‪ Polyline‬ﻓﺈن آﺎﻧﺖ ‪ Static Label‬وﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ ‪ Explode‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط‬ ‫‪ Polyline‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻞ اﻟـ ‪ Static Label‬آﻤﺎ هﻮ أﻣﺎ ﻟﻮ آﺎﻧﺖ ‪ Dynamic Label‬و ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻔﺠﻴﺮ ‪ Explode‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط‬ ‫‪ Polyline‬ﻓﺴﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ اﻟـ ‪.Dynamic Label‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎت ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻘﺪم )'( ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ أن وﺣﺪات اﻟﺮﺳﻢ هﻲ اﻟﻤﺘﺮ و هﺬا ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪Label Style‬‬ ‫‪ Definition‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ هﺬا اﻟﺨﻂ ﻟﻴﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺪات اﻟﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬أﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺎوﻳﻦ آﻼ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺗﻢ‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Boundary_label‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎر ﺣﺪد ﻟﻴﻀﻊ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ادﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ LOA‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ آﻞ ﻃﺒﻘﺎت اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺰل ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻗﻄﻊ اﻷراﺿﻲ ‪ Lots‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻌﻨﻮن ﺧﻄﻮط ﻗﻄﻊ اﻷراﺿﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ LAI‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﺎن ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ ،Layer(s) to isolate‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Layers‬اﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ LOT_LINES‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(121‬‬

‫‪- 69 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪121‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Layer Properties Manager‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻷدوات ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Layer Manager‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Lot_label‬و ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرهﺎ آﺎﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪) Current Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (121‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪122‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Show Dialog Bar‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Style Properties‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Curve‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Label Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) length above, radius below‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(123‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪123‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Add Dynamic Labels‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ آﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط ﻗﻄﻊ اﻷراﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪.(124‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن ﺧﻄﻮط ﻗﻄﻊ اﻷراﺿﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺘﻬﺎ و ﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻟﺘﺪاﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻮق ﺑﻌﺾ‪.‬‬

‫‪- 70 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪124‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻜﺎﺋﻦ ‪Changing a Label Attached to an Object‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻌﻨﻮان ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻳﻀﺔ اﻟﻨﺺ ﺣﻮل ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ آﺎﺋﻦ و ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪.Label Style‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Swap Label Text‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﻤﺸﺎر إﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ 124‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(125‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪125‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﺨﻂ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ أرض ‪.Lot‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Style Properties‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Line‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Label Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪) stacked below - direction, distance‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(126‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪126‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Delete Labels‬‬ ‫إن اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Delete Labels‬ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﺤﺬف اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎر ﻋﻠﻰ أي ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪- 71 -‬‬

By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez

Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials

‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Enter ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Add Dynamic Labels ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Labels ‫ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬-4 .(127

127 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬

- 72 -

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮ‪ :‬إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Lesson 10: Creating Label Styles for Lines and‬‬ ‫‪Points‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻘﻚ اﻟﺨﺎص ﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط واﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت و اﻟﺤﻠﺰون و اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ اﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر ‪ C:\Land Projects 2006‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗــﺎﺋــﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧــﺘـــﺮ ‪ TUTORIAL1‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧــﺘــــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-10.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط ‪Creating a New Line Label Style‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﺴﻖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ و إدﻣﺎج اﻟﻄﻮل ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺗﻲ اﻟﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﻤﺘﺮ و اﻟﻘﺪم ﻓﻮق اﻟﺨﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻘﻴﺎس ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺪم و ﺗﺤﺖ اﻟﺨﻂ ﺳﺘﻀﻊ اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻲ ‪ X‬و ‪ Y‬ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻲ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ و اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Edit Label Styles‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Edit Label Styles‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Line Label Styles‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Name List‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) distance above, direction below‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(128‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪128‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ Lot Plan for XYZ Co‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(129‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Above‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬف ﻋﻼﻣﺔ وﺣﺪة اﻟﻘﺪم )'( اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ }‪ {Length‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻒ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺛﻢ ‪) m‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(129‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪129‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ '}‪) {Length*3.28084‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(130‬‬ ‫‪- 73 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﺘﺠﻨﺐ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮات زاﺋﺪة ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺪرج أﺳﻄﺮ زاﺋﺪة ﻋﻨﺪ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ‪ Text Above‬أو اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬ ‫‪ ،Text Below‬ﻓﻬﺬا ﺳﻴﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻇﻬﻮر ﻓﻲ أﺳﻄﺮ ﻓﺎرﻏﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﺺ و اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻮن‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪130‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Below‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬف }‪.{Direction‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Below‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ N‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Data‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Start Northing‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪>> Text Below‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(131‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪131‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﺴﻄﺮ أﺿﻒ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ E‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻒ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟـ ‪ Data‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Start Easting‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) >> Text Below‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(132‬‬

‫‪- 74 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪132‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻴﻒ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻔﺄرة ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺴﻄﺮ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻨﺺ}‪ ({Start Easting‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ N‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Data‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ End Northing‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) >> Text Below‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(133‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻟﺴﻄﺮ أﺿﻒ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺛﻢ ادﺧــﻞ ‪ E‬ﺛــﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ أﺧﺮى و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Data‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ End Easting‬ﺛﻢ اﺿــﻐﻂ ﻋـﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪) >> Text Below‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(133‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪133‬‬ ‫‪ -12‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Properties‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ 0.5‬أﻣﺎم اﻟـ ‪ Offset‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ L100‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ Lot_label‬أﻣﺎم‬ ‫‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(134‬‬

‫‪- 75 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪134‬‬ ‫‪ -13‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Units‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Linear‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Linear Units‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(135‬‬ ‫‪ -14‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺴﻢ ‪ precision‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ 3‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Linear‬و ادﺧﻞ ‪ 4‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Coordinates‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،(135‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع‬ ‫إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Edit Label Styles‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪135‬‬ ‫‪ -15‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Save‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار‪.‬‬ ‫هﻜﺬا ﻗﺪ أﺗﻤﻤﺖ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺧﻂ ‪Labeling a Line‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﻖ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺬي أﻧﺸﺄﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Show Dialog Bar‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Style Properties‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Line‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Label Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Lot Plan for XYZ Co‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Add Dynamic Labels‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﺬي أﻣﺎﻣﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(136‬‬

‫‪- 76 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪136‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ اﻵن ﺑﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﻖ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬و ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻮق اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﻄﻮل ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺘﺎر و اﻟﻘﺪم‪ ،‬و ﻣﻦ أﺳﻔﻠﻪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ إﺣﺪاﺛﻲ آﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺘﻲ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ و‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ و اﻟﺤﻠﺰون ‪ Curve and Spiral‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ اﺗﺒﻌﺖ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺨﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط ‪Creating a New Point Label Style‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ أرآﺎن ﻗﻄﻊ اﻷراﺿﻲ ‪.Lot Corner Elevation‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Label Styles‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Edit Label Styles‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Point Label Styles‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ Lot Corner Elevations‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(137‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪137‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Data‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Elevation‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) >> Text‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(138‬‬

‫‪- 77 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪138‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻔﺄرة ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻨﺺ }‪ {Elevation‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Data‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Northing‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) >> Text‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(139‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪139‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﺿﻊ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻔﺄرة ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﻨﺺ }‪ {Northing‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Data‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Easting‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) >> Text‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(140‬‬

‫‪- 78 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪140‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Properties‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ 1‬أﻣﺎم اﻟـ ‪ Offset‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Justification‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺰر اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻷزرار اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﻮل اﻟﺤﺮف ‪) X‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(141‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪141‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ L80‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ Lot_elevation_label‬أﻣﺎم اﻟـ ‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(142‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪142‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Save‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫هﻜﺬا ﺗﻜﻮن ﻗﺪ أﺗﻤﻤﺖ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪Labeling a Point‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ Label a Point‬و ﺑﻌﺪهﺎ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﻐﻠﻖ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪.Point Marker Text‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪- 79 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Style Properties‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Point‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Label Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Lot‬‬ ‫‪) Corner Elevations‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(143‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪143‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 46‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Add Dynamic Labels‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(144‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪144‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﻖ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪ 46‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Display Properties‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Display Properties‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Text‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Visible‬و أﻣﺎم اﻟﺨﻴﺎرات ‪ Number‬و ‪ Elevation‬و‬ ‫‪) Description‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (145‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار‪.‬‬

‫‪- 80 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪145‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ اﻵن ﺑﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ و آﺬﻟﻚ إزاﻟﺔ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(146‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪146‬‬

‫‪- 81 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺤﺎدي ﻋﺸﺮ‪ :‬إﻧﺸﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ و ﺟﺪاول ﻟﻠﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪Lesson 11: Creating Tag Labels and Object‬‬ ‫‪Tables‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻂ أو اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ أو اﻟﺤﻠﺰون ﻗﺒﻞ أن ﺗﻨﺸﺊ ﺟﺪاول ﻣﻦ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﻤﺠﺮد أن ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺟﺪاول ﻣﻦ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت )ﺟﺪاول ﻟﻠﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت(‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر ‪ C:\Land Projects 2006‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋـﻤــﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧـــﺘـــﺮ ‪ TUTORIAL1‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧــــﺘــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-11.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪Creating a New Tag Style‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ و ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺿﻮاﺑﻂ ‪ Parameters‬ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Edit Tag Styles‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Edit Tag Label Styles‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Line Label Styles‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ Boundary Tags for XYZ Co‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(147‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Properties‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Style List‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ L200‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ Boundary_tags‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪.(147‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪147‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Curve Label Styles‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ Boundary Tags for XYZ Co‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪.(148‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Properties‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Style‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ L200‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ Boundary_tags‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪.(148‬‬

‫‪- 82 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪148‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Save‬ﺛﻢ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار‪.‬‬ ‫هﻜﺬا ﺗﻜﻮن ﻗﺪ أﻧﻬﻴﺖ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪Labeling Objects with Tags‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻌﺰل ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻟـ ‪ Boundary‬و ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ‪ Polyline‬اﻟﺤﺪود ﺑﻨﺴﻖ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ أدﺧﻞ ‪ LAI‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﺤﺪود اﻷزرق ‪ Blue Polyline‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪ Layer(s) to isolate‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Show Dialog Bar‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺷﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Style Properties‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(149‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Label‬ﻟﺘﺘﺤﻮل إﻟﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪ ،Tag‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Line‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Tag Style‬أﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪) Boundary Tags for XYZ Co‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(149‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪149‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Curve‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Current Tag Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Boundary Tags for XYZ Co‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪.(150‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪150‬‬ ‫‪- 83 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Add Tag Labels‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ آﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدي اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(151‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪151‬‬ ‫آﻤﺎ ﺗﺮى ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ آﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ‪ Polyline‬ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط ‪Creating a Line Table‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪ Tag Label‬ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺠﺪول ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮدﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت )إﺣﺪاﺛﻲ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ‪ Y‬و إﺣﺪاﺛﻲ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ‪ (X‬إﻟﻰ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Add Tables‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Line Table‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Line‬‬ ‫‪.Table Definition‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Table Title‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Text Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) L500‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(152‬‬

‫‪- 84 -‬‬

By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez

Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials

152 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ No ‫ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﺰر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻓﻮق رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ و اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ‬،Column Definition ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ .(153 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Column #4 – Definition ‫( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬152 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Column .(153 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Header ‫ أﻣﺎم‬START NORTHING ‫ أدﺧﻞ‬Column Header Information ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ Text ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ أن ﻗﺴﻢ‬Add Value ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Start Northing ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Display Value Information ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬ .(153 ‫{ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Start Northing} ‫ﻳﻌﺮض‬ .Linear Units ‫( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬153 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Linear ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Units ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬

- 85 -

-4 -5 -6 -7

By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez

Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials

153 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ Column #4 – ‫ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬OK ‫( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬154 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Coordinate ‫ أﻣﺎم‬4 ‫ أدﺧﻞ‬-8 .Definition

154 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .Line Table Definition ‫ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬OK ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬-9 No ‫ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﺰر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻓﻮق رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ و اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ‬،Column Definition ‫ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬-10 .(155 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Column #5 – Definition ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬Column .(155 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Header ‫ أﻣﺎم‬START EASTING ‫ أدﺧﻞ‬Column Header Information ‫ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬-11 Text ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ أن ﻗﺴﻢ‬Add Value ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Start Easting ‫ أﺧﺘﺮ‬Display Value Information ‫ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬-12 .(155 ‫{ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Start Easting} ‫ﻳﻌﺮض‬

- 86 -

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪155‬‬ ‫‪ -13‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Line Table Definition‬‬ ‫‪ -14‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Line Table Definition‬‬ ‫‪ -15‬أﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ إدراج اﻟﺠﺪول إﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺪول ﺳﻴﻜﻮن ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(156‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪156‬‬ ‫‪ -16‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ اﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ أو اﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﺮؤﻳﺔ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺠﺪول‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﺠﺪول ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ 156‬ﻋﻤﺎ هﻮ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻨﺪك أﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻼف ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎت ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎرهﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط ‪Creating a Point Table‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ واﺣﺪة‪.‬‬ ‫‪- 87 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪ Lesson-3.dwg‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ‪.Tutorial2‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Add Table‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Point Table‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Points‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(157‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Point Groups‬و اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪) Control‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(157‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪157‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ List‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ إﻟﻰ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(158‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪158‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Summary‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻋﺪد اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ إﻟﻰ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(159‬‬

‫‪- 88 -‬‬

By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez

Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials

159 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .(160 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Point Table Definition ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬OK ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬-6 .(160 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Text ‫ أﻣﺎم‬MY POINT TABLE ‫ أدﺧﻞ‬Table Title ‫ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬-7 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬No Column ‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ و اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ‬Column Definition ‫ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬-8 .Column #4 – Definition ‫( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬160

160 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .(161 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Header ‫ أﻣﺎم‬NORTHING ‫ ادﺧﻞ‬Column Header Information ‫ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬-9 Text ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ أن اﻟﻘﺴﻢ‬،Add Value ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Northing ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Display Value Information ‫ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬-10 .(161 ‫{ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Northing} ‫ﻳﻌﺮض‬

- 89 -

By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez

Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials

161 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .Point Table Definition ‫ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬OK ‫ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬-11 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ‬No Column ‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ رأس اﻟﻌﻤﻮد اﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ و اﻟﻤﺴﻤﺎة‬Column Definition ‫ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬-12 .Column #5 – Definition ‫( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬162 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬

162 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .(163 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Header ‫ أﻣﺎم‬EASTING ‫ ادﺧﻞ‬Column Header Information ‫ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‬-13 - 90 -

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -14‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Display Value Information‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Easting‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،Add Value‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ أن اﻟﻘﺴﻢ ‪ Text‬ﻳﻌﺮض‬ ‫}‪) {Easting‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(163‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪163‬‬ ‫‪ -15‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Point Table Definition‬‬ ‫‪ -16‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Point Table Definition‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -17‬أﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ إدراج اﻟﺠﺪول إﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﺳﻴﻜﻮن ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(164‬‬ ‫‪ -18‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ اﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ أو اﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﺮؤﻳﺔ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺠﺪول‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪164‬‬ ‫آﻤﺎ ﺗﺮى ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ‪ 247‬و ‪ 758‬ﻷﻧﻬﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮدﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪ ،‬اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إدراﺟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ )إﻋﺎدة ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ( ﺟﺪول ‪Updating (Re-drawing) an Object Table‬‬ ‫إن أﻣﺮ ‪ Re-Draw Table‬ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻚ ﺗﺤﺪث ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـﺨﻂ ‪ Line‬أو ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ‪ Curve‬أو ﺣﻠﺰون ‪ ،Spiral‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل‬ ‫ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط ‪ Line Table‬و اﻟﺬي ﻳﻌﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ‪ 20‬ﺧﻂ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺤﺬف ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻦ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﺈن‬ ‫اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Re-Draw Table‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺠﺪول ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ‪ Tutorial1‬و ﻣﻨﻪ اﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪.Lesson-11.dwg‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻓﻲ درس ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط )إن ﻟﻢ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء‬ ‫ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ أي ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺧﻄﻮط و ﻻﺣﻆ أن اﻟﺠﺪول ﻣﺎزال ﻳﻌﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت هﺬﻩ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Labels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Tables‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Re-Draw Table‬‬

‫‪- 91 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -5‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﻤﺮاد ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻪ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ،Enter‬ﻻﺣﻆ أن اﻟﺠﺪول ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬و ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬف ﺻﻔﻮف اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﻤﺤﺬوﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫إن اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Re-Draw Table‬ﻳﺤﺪث آﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت اﻟﻤﻌﺮوﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ إﺣﺪاﺛﻲ اﻟﺸﻤﺎل أو اﻟﺸﺮق‬ ‫‪ Northing or Easting‬ﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول ﻓﺈن اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Re-Draw Table‬ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﻢ اﻟﺠﺪول آﻜﺎﺋﻦ ‪Understanding Table Objects‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻮف ﺗﻌﺮف اﻟﻔﺮق ﺑﻴﻦ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺠﺪاول ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Create Table Object‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Table‬‬ ‫‪ Definition‬و اﻟﺠﺪاول اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ دون اﺳﺘﺨﺪام هﺬا اﻟﺨﻴﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ‪ Tutorial1‬و ﻣﻨﻪ اﻓﺘﺢ اﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪.Lesson-11.dwg‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط و ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪم اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪) Create Table Object‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ آﻴﻔﻴﺔ إﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط اﺗﺒﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ(‪ ،‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ NOT TABLE OBJECT‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻨﺺ أﻣﺎم ‪) Text‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‪(Table Title‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ،(165‬ﺛﻢ أدرج هﺬا اﻟﺠﺪول إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(166‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪165‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪166‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط و ﻟﻜﻦ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺮة أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Table Object‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Line Table‬‬ ‫‪) Definition‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ آﻴﻔﻴﺔ إﻧﺸﺎء ﺟﺪول ﻟﻠﺨﻄﻮط اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎت ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ(‪،‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Table Object‬أدﺧﻞ ‪TABLE‬‬ ‫‪ OBJECT‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Layer‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ IS TABLE OBJECT‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻨﺺ أﻣﺎم ‪) Text‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ‪) (Table Title‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(167‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬أدرج هﺬا اﻟﺠﺪول إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ أو ﻓﻮﻗﻪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(168‬‬

‫‪- 92 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪167‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪168‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ ‪ NOT TABLE OBJECT‬أﺧﺘﺮ أي ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﺠﺪول‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ أن اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﺬي ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ هﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎرﻩ و ﻟﻴﺲ اﻟﺠﺪول ﺑﺄآﻤﻠﻪ و ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ هﺬا اﻟﺨﻂ ﺳﻴﺘﺤﺮك ﺑﻤﻔﺮدﻩ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(169‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪169‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ ‪ IS TABLE OBJECT‬أﺧﺘﺮ أي ﺧﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺪول و ﻻﺣﻆ اﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺠﺪول ﺑﺄآﻤﻠﻪ‬ ‫و ﻟﻴﺲ اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﺬي ﺿﻐﻄﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ و إن ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ هﺬا اﻟﺨﻂ ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﺤﺮك اﻟﺠﺪول ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(170‬‬ ‫‪- 93 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪170‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ ‪ IS TABLE OBJECT‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ هﺬا اﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺪاول أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﺎﺳﻚ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺠﺪول ﺑﺄآﻤﻠﻪ و اﺳﺤﺐ اﻟﺠﺪول إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﺎن اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(171‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪171‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺪول اﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ ‪ NOT TABLE OBJECT‬أﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺠﺪول ﺑﺄآﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﻮاء ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Window‬أو ‪Cross‬‬ ‫‪ ،Selection‬وﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ هﺬا اﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺪاول ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ اﻟﺠﺪول ﻣﺎزال ﻣﺨﺘﺎرا ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أي ﺟﺰء ﻣﻨﻪ ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ أﺳﺤﺒﻪ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﻜﺎن اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ إدراﺟﻪ ﻓﻴﻪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(172‬‬

‫‪- 94 -‬‬

By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez

Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials

172 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬

- 95 -

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﺸﺮ‪ :‬اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻷرض‪Lesson 12: Working with the Terrain Model Explorer‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻷرض ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻤﻮذج رﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻸرض ‪Digital Terrain Model‬‬ ‫)‪ (DTMs‬ﻣﻦ أي ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر )ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب اﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎوي( و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر و ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر ‪ C:\Land Projects 2006‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣــﻦ ﻗﺎﺋـﻤـﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧـــﺘــــﺮ ‪ TUTORIAL1‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧــــﺘــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-12.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ‪Creating a New Surface Folder‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪.Terrain Model Explorer‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Terrain‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و أﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Create New Surface‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(173‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪173‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﻋﻄﺎء اﻻﺳﻢ ‪ Surface1‬ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ و ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪) Terrain‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(174‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪174‬‬ ‫‪- 96 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -3‬أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ Surface1‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(174‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ )‪ (+‬ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﺳﻢ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ آﻤﺎ هﻮ ﻣﺸﺎر إﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ 174‬ﻟﺘﺴـﺘﻌـــﺮض اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪TIN‬‬ ‫‪) Data‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(175‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪175‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Surface1‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Rename‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Rename Surface‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(176‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ Area1‬ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ New surface name‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(176‬‬ ‫اﻵن أﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﺪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪176‬‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪Adding Point Data‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ Area1‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪.TIN data‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Point Groups‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Add Point Group‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Add Point Group‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(177‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Point group name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Area1‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ‪) Terrain Model Explorer‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(177‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪177‬‬ ‫‪- 97 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪) Terrain Model Explorer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(178‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪178‬‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر ‪Adding Contour Data‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ‪ :‬ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻹﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ و ﻓﻲ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﺣﻖ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺬي أﻧﺸﺊ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ و ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪم اﻟﺨﻠﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ هﺬﻳﻦ اﻟﻤﻔﻬﻮﻣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻜﻤﺎ ﻗﻠﻨﺎ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ أن اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﻧﺸﺎؤﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط أو ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﺈن‬ ‫آﻨﺖ ﺗﻤﻠﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و أﻧﺸﺄت ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ هﺬا اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻓﻼ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط )ﺧﻄﻮط‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر( اﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ )ﻓﻬﻲ ﻧﺎﺗﺠﺔ أو أﻧﺸﺄت ﺑﻌﺪ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ(‪ ،‬أﻣﺎ ﻟﻮ آﻨﺖ ﺗﻤﻠﻚ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر و ﻻ ﺗﻤﻠﻚ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﻨﺎء ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻦ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط )ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر( و ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻴﺎ ﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﺗﻤﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬ ‫و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ هﺬا اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت و رﺳﻢ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ Area1‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Contours‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Contour Weeding‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪ Weeding factors‬و ‪) Supplementing factors‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(179‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪179‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Layer‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ أي ﺧﻂ آﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(180‬‬

‫‪- 98 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪180‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪) Terrain Model Explorer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(181‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪181‬‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎط ‪Adding Breakline Data from Points‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎط و ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪ 2D Polyline‬و ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻼﺛﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد‬ ‫‪ 3D Polyline‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮدﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ أوﻻ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ‪ Breakline‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ‪ Centerline‬ﻟﻘﺎع اﻟﻨﻬﺮ‬ ‫‪.Streambed‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﺟﺎﻧﺒﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ LAI‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ إﺣﺪى ﻧﻘﺎط ﺧﻂ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻗﺎع اﻟﻨﻬﺮ ‪) Streambed Centerline‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰهﺎ ﺑﻠﻮن‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ‪ Point Marker‬و هﻮ اﻷزرق اﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ‪ Cyan‬و وﺻﻔﻬﺎ ‪ Description‬و هﻮ ‪) Strm Bed‬اﻧﻈﺮ إﻟﻰ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺸﺎر إﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ .((182‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Layer(s) to isolate‬‬

‫‪- 99 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪182‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض ‪ STREAM_PNTS‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻨﺪوق ‪ Enter Item‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﻌﺰل اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎرة )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪.(183‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪183‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Breaklines‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Define‬‬ ‫‪.by Point‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬أﺧﺘﺮ أول ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎع اﻟﻨﻬﺮ ﺛﻢ أﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻦ أﺳﻔﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ و ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Enter‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(184‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ‪ :‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ رﻗﻢ ‪ 2591‬و اﻟﻤﺤﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺪاﺋﺮة ﺣﻤﺮاء ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ 184‬ﺣﻴﺚ أﻧﻬﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻘﺎع اﻟﻨﻬﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪- 100 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﺨﺘﺮ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪184‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ Streambed‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Terrain Breaklines‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ No‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار و ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت‬ ‫ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر و ﺗﻜﻮن آﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﻗﻤﺔ أو رأس ‪ Vertex‬ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﺨﻂ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(185‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪185‬‬ ‫‪- 101 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫آﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪) Terrain Model Explorer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(186‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪186‬‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻼﺛﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪Adding Breakline Data from 3D Polylines‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻼﺛﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد و اﻟﺬي ﻳﻌﺮف ﺣﺎﻓﺔ رﺻﻴﻒ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ‪Roadway‬‬ ‫‪.Edge of Pavement‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ أدﺧﻞ ‪ LOA‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﺪ آﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪ Layers‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﻠﻈﻬﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ LAI‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ )ﻣﺸﺎر إﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ (187‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Layer(s) to isolate‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪187‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض ‪ EOP_3D‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻨﺪوق ‪ Enter Item‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(188‬‬

‫‪- 102 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪188‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Breaklines‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺰر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ أﺧﺘﺮ ‪Define by‬‬ ‫‪.Polyline‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ Existing_Road_EOP‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ أﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و اﻟﺬي ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ ،Crossing Box‬و ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر آﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدي اﻟﺨﻄﻮط‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Terrain Breaklines‬و ﻣﻨﻪ أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ No‬ﻟﻌﺪم ﺣﺬف أي ﺧﻄﻮط اﻧﻜﺴﺎر‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ و ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار و ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪) Terrain Model Explorer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(189‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪189‬‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪Adding Breakline Data from 2D Polylines‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪ 2D Polylines‬و اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ رﺳﻤﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ رﺻﻴﻒ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫‪ Roadway edge of pavement‬و اﻟﻘﻨﺎة ‪ Ditch‬و أرض أﺳﺎس اﻟﺴﻜﺔ اﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.Railway Bed‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ أدﺧﻞ ‪ LOA‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﺪ آﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪ Layers‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﻠﻈﻬﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ LAI‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Layer(s) to isolate‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Layers‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2D_Breaklines‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (190‬ﻟﺘﻌﺰل اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪.2D_Breaklines‬‬

‫‪- 103 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪190‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟـ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Breaklines‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪.Proximity by Polylines‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ Misc_Topo‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ ‪ Description‬ﺛﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟـ ‪ Cross Box‬أﺧﺘﺮ آﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدي اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪2D‬‬ ‫‪ Polylines‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺑﻌﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر آﻞ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Terrain Breaklines‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪No‬‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(191‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪191‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ أﺧﺮى إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار و ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر و ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر هﺬﻩ اﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Yes‬أﻳﻀﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(192‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪192‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪) Terrain Model Explorer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(193‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪193‬‬ ‫‪- 104 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪Adding Surface Boundary Data‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻀﻴﻒ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺤﺪود ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ أدﺧﻞ ‪ LOA‬ﻻﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎع آﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Boundaries‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Add‬‬ ‫‪.Boundary Definition‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻷﺑﻴﺾ )اﻟﻤﺸﺎر إﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ (194‬و اﻟﺬي ﻳﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺴﻄﺢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ اﻷرض‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ Area1‬ﻟﻼﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Enter‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪194‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ اﻟﺤﺪ ‪ Boundary Type‬اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ و هﻮ ﺧﺎرﺟﻲ ‪.Outer‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ No‬ﻟـ ‪ making breaklines along edges‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻨﻬﻲ اﻷﻣﺮ و ﺗﺮﺟﻊ إﻟﻰ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪Terrain‬‬ ‫‪.Model Explorer‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺪ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر ‪ Breaklines‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل اﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﺈن اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت داﺧﻞ ﺣﺪ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ Surface Boundary‬هﻲ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟـ ‪) Terrain Model Explorer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(195‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪195‬‬

‫‪- 105 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺑﻨﺎء ﺳﻄﺢ ‪Building a Surface‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺒﻨﺎء ﺳﻄﺢ ‪ Build a Surface‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر و ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Area1‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Build‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Build Area1‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ Area1‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ ) اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(196‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Surface Data Options‬أزل اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪ Use point file data‬و ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪Minimize flat‬‬ ‫‪) triangles resulting from contour data‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(196‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ آﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺴﻄﺢ و ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪196‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Build Progress‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺒﻨﺎء اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪.(197‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪197‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ ،Terrain Model Explorer‬و اﻵن ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮذج ﻟﻸرض ﺗﻢ ﺑﻨﺎؤﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻣﻤﺜﻼ ﻇﺮوف اﻷرض اﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(198‬‬ ‫‪- 106 -‬‬

By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez

Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials

198 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .‫ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻐﻠﻘﻬﺎ‬Terrain Model Explorer ‫ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة‬-6

- 107 -

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻋﺸﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ ‪Lesson 13: Editing Surfaces‬‬ ‫إن دﻗﺔ ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ دﻗﺔ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈن آﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ )ﻓﻲ اﻷرﺟﺢ ﺗﻜﻮن ﻧﻘﺎط(‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺛﺮة و ﻏﻴﺮ آﺜﻴﻔﺔ و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻧﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ أﻓﻀﻞ اﻟﺤﺎﻻت ﻧﻤﻮذج ﻏﺎﻣﺾ أو ﻣﻠﺘﺒﺲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ و إن آﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ‬ ‫آﺜﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻤﻦ اﻟﻤﻬﻢ اﻟﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻇﺮوف اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺎت ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ اﻟﺪﻗﺔ )ﻣﺬآﻮرة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺪرس( ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎت أﺧﺮى و هﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺬآﻮرة ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر ‪ C:\Land Projects 2006‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧــﺘــﺮ ‪ TUTORIAL1‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋــﻤــﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧـــﺘــــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-13.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺎآﻞ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ ‪Identifying Triangulation Problems‬‬ ‫إن ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ أوﻻ ﺷﻲء أﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻻ ﻏﻨﻰ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﺸﺎآﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪ ،‬و ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ رﺳﻤﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮر ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺷﻲء ﻣﻔﻴﺪ أو ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻮ آﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻴﻜﻮن أﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮق ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﺸﺎآﻞ ﺑﻨﻤﻮذج اﻟﺴﻄﺢ أن ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر و ﺗﺮى أﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ اﻟﻈﻮاهﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع ‪Ridgelines‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺗﻼل أو ﺟﺒﺎل( أو ﻗﻴﻌﺎن اﻷﻧﻬﺎر ‪ Streambeds‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺑﺎﻷهﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻨﻤﻮذج و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﺒﺎرزة و اﻟﻐﻴﺮ هﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺪل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺸﺎآﻞ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ‪ ،‬و اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺎآﻞ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ هﻲ أن ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼل ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﺗﻤﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺣﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺄآﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ ،Select Surface‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ Selection‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Area1b‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(199‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪199‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮى ﻧﻤﻮذج اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ اﻟﺬي ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺸﺎآﻞ دون إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أي آﺎﺋﻦ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪.Quick View‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Surface Display‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Quick View‬‬ ‫‪- 108 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ رﺳﻢ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت ﺑﺨﻄﻮط ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺪاﺋﺮة ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪) (200‬ﻻﺣﻆ أن هﺬا اﻟﺠﺰء ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻨﺎؤﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر( ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن ﺧﻄﻮط‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت ﺗﻤﺘﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻄﻲ آﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﺘﺴﺎوﻳﺎن ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب و ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ هﺬا ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ اﻟﺤﺎﻻت ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪد اﻷﺳﻄﺢ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ و ﻟﻜﻦ أﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﺪوي ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﺜﻞ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺸﺎآﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪوﺛﻬﺎ‪ ،‬أﻳﻀﺎ ﻳﺼﺎﺣﺐ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻇﻬﻮر اﻟﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﺴﺘﻮي أو ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻨﺤﺪر ﺑﺸﺪة و هﺬا ﻻ ﻳﻌﻜﺲ ﺷﻜﻞ اﻟﻤﻴﻞ اﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ أدﺧﻞ ‪ Redraw‬ﻟﺘﻤﺴﺢ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ اﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪200‬‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ ‪Adding Points to the Surface‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط إﻟﻰ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ و ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﻋﺎدة ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻓﻲ أي وﻗﺖ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ إﻋﺎدة ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط إﻟﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ذاﺗﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮة‪.‬‬ ‫أوﻻ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮاد أﺿﻼع اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ آﺨﻄﻮط ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪.3D Lines‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Surface‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Import 3D Lines‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ و هﻮ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﺘﻤﺴﺢ أﺿﻼع ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ أن ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﺪدة ذات ﻣﻨﺴﻮب ﻣﺘﺴﺎوي و هﻮ ‪ 122‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ،‬أﺿﻒ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻲ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر )ﻣﺮآﺰ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة رﻗﻢ ‪ (1‬و ﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﻣﻨﺴﻮﺑﻬﺎ ‪ 121.5‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Surface‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Add Point‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Center Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺮآﺰ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة اﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮة رﻗﻢ ‪ ،1‬و ادﺧﻞ ‪ 121.5‬ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺴﻮب ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ و أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ و ﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت اﻟﻤﺴﻄﺤﺔ ﻣﺎزاﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(201‬‬

‫‪- 109 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪201‬‬ ‫إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أو ﺣﺬف ﺧﻄﻮط ﻣﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت ‪Adding and Deleting TIN Lines‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻀﻴﻒ ﺧﻄﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﺼﺤﺢ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ اﻟﻤﺴﻄﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Surface‬ﺛﻢ ‪.Add Line‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ رؤوس أﺿﻼع اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت داﺧﻞ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة ‪ 1‬آﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ‪ From point‬ﺛﻢ رؤوس‬ ‫أﺿﻼع اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت داﺧﻞ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة رﻗﻢ ‪ 2‬آﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ To point‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺨﻂ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬و ‪ 2‬و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﻊ هﺬا اﻟﺨﻂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(202‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪202‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮط ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت اﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ أو اﻟﺪﺧﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬أﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﻔﻀﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺨﺎرﺟﻴﺔ و ﻳﺠﺐ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﺬف اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﻔﻀﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ إﻟﻲ اﻟﻴﺴﺎر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪.2‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2B‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪- 110 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Surface‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Delete Line‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻔﻀﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(203‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪203‬‬ ‫ﻗﻠﺐ أوﺟﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت ‪Flipping TIN Faces‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫إن ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮن اﻷزرق اﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ‪ Cyan‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺤﺪة )ذات ﻧﺘﻮء ﺣﺎد( ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ‪ 3‬و ‪ ،4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻞ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﻘﻠﺐ أوﺟﻪ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ‪ 3‬و ‪.4‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit Surface‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Flip Face‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬أﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﺬي ﻳﻘﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ‪ 3‬و ‪ 4‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪-204‬ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻠﺐ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪204‬‬ ‫‪- 111 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎدة إﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻟﺘﺮى اﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﺜﻠﻴﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Contours‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Create Contours‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬أﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺼﻨﺪوق ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(205‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪205‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ ‪ Yes‬آﺨﻴﺎر اﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﺤﺬف ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ‪.erase old contours‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﺑﻨﺎءا ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت و ﺳﺘﺮى أن ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ اﻧﺴﻴﺎﺑﻲ و‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺣﺎد )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(206‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪206‬‬

‫‪- 112 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪Applying Surface Edit History‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ أن ﺗﻢ ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ و ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج أﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ إﻟﻰ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر‪ ،‬و ﻋﻨﺪ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أي ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط‬ ‫اﻻﻧﻜﺴﺎر ﻓﻴﺠﺐ إﻋﺎدة ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪ ،‬و ﻳﺠﺐ هﺬا أﻳﻀﺎ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ أو ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪Surface‬‬ ‫‪.Editing‬‬ ‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ و إﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ إﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺛﻢ إﻋﺎدة ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ إﻋﺎدة ﺑﻨﺎؤﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ إﻋﺎدة ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Apply Edit History‬ﻓﺈن ذﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﺒﻨﻲ ﺳﻄﺤﺎ ﺟﺪﻳﺪا و ﻣﻄﺒﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﺠﻞ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ أﻣﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻗﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ دون اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Apply Edit History‬ﻓﺈن ذﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﻌﻴﺪ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ إﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻪ اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-1‬‬ ‫‪-2‬‬ ‫‪-3‬‬ ‫‪-4‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Terrain Model Explorer‬‬ ‫أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Area1b‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Build‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Surface‬‬ ‫‪.Modified‬‬ ‫أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﺘﻌﻠﻢ أن اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﻗﺪ ﻋﺪل و ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Build Area1b‬‬ ‫أدﺧﻞ ‪ Area1b‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Surface Data Options‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر آﻼ ﻣﻦ ‪ Surface Data Options‬و‬ ‫‪ Use breakline data‬و ‪) Use contour data‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(207‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪207‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬اﺧﺘﺮ آﻼ ﻣﻦ ‪ Minimize flat triangles resulting from contour data‬و ‪) Apply Edit History‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪ (207‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺴﻄﺢ و إﻋﺎدة ﺑﻨﺎؤﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ رﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﻴﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﺛﻢ أﻏﻠﻖ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪.Terrain Model Explorer‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Surface Edit‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ،Import 3D Lines‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬ ‫‪ Yes‬آﺨﻴﺎر اﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﺤﺬف ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ‪.Erase old surface view‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن اﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼت اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ إﻋﺎدة ﺑﻨﺎء اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‪.‬‬

‫‪- 113 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ‪ :‬إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪Lesson 14: Creating Contours‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ إﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر آﻤﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ‪ Polyline‬أو آﻜﺎﺋﻦ آﻨﺘﻮر ‪ ،Contour Object‬إن اﺳﺘﺨﺪام آﺎﺋﻨﺎت اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ أﺻﻐﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ و ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﻣﺮوﻧﺔ أآﺒﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر )إﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ آﺘﺎﺑﺔ إﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر(‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر ‪ C:\Land Projects 2006‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣـﻦ ﻗﺎﺋــﻤـــﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧــﺘﺮ ‪ TUTORIAL1‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋــﻤـــﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧـــﺘـﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-14.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪Creating Contours‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء آﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع و ﺑﻨﺎءا ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ و هﻮ اﻟﻨﺴﻖ اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫‪ Standard Style‬اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Contour Style Manager‬آﺨﻴﺎر اﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻨﺸﺊ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ رأﺳﻲ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺘﺮ و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ رأﺳﻲ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Select Surface‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ Selection‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) AREA1C‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (208‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬

‫‪-2‬‬ ‫‪-3‬‬ ‫‪-4‬‬ ‫‪-5‬‬ ‫‪-6‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪208‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Contours‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Create Contours‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(209‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Intervals‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Both Minor and Major‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(209‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Minor Interval‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ هﻲ ‪ CONT-MNR‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(209‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Major Interval‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ هﻲ ‪ CONT-MJR‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Layer‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(209‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Properties‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ ) Contour Objects‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (209‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﺊ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر‪.‬‬

‫‪- 114 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪209‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﺤﺬف اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻢ ‪.erase old contours‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ رأﺳﻲ أﺳﺎﺳﻲ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺘﺮ و ﻓﺎﺻﻞ رأﺳﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻮي ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(210‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪210‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪Creating a New Contour Style‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ ،Contour Style Manager‬ﺳﺘﻌﺪل ﻣﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر و‬ ‫آﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻇﻬﻮر اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر و ﺗﻌﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﻟﺨﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﺮدﻳﺔ أو ﻟﻜﻞ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪- 115 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Contour Style Manager‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Contour Style‬‬ ‫‪) Manager‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(211‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Manage Styles‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Contour Styles in Drawing‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ SMOOTH‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Add‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(211‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪211‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ أي ﻣﺸﺮوع ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Save‬أو ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Contour Appearance‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن ‪ Current Style‬هﻮ ‪) SMOOTH‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(212‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Contour Display‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Contours and Grips‬ﺛﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Smoothing Options‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Add‬‬ ‫‪ Vertices‬و اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻖ إﻟﻰ ‪) 8‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(212‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪212‬‬ ‫‪- 116 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Text Style‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Text Properties‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Style‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2MM‬و اﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺪﻗﺔ إﻟﻰ ‪) 0‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪.(213‬‬

‫‪-6‬‬ ‫‪-7‬‬ ‫‪-8‬‬ ‫‪-9‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪213‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﻠﻮن ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪ Color‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Select Color‬و ﻣﻨﻪ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻠﻮن اﻷزرق اﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ‬ ‫‪ Cyan‬ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Style Manager‬أو أدﺧﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ 4‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺨﺎﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﺠﺎورة‬ ‫ﻟﺼﻨﺪوق اﻟﻠﻮن( )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(213‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ أﻣﺎم ‪ Suffix‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) m‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(213‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Label Position‬و ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺴﻢ ‪ Orientation‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ On Contour‬و أﻳﻀﺎ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر‬ ‫‪) Break Contour For Label‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(214‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Readability‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Label Positive Slope‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Border Around Label‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Rectangular‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (214‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪214‬‬ ‫اﻵن ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪- 117 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪Applying a New Contour Style‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻟﻨﺴﻖ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ‪ SMOOTH‬ﻋﻠﻰ آﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪ Layer Icon‬و ﻗﻢ ﺑﺠﻌﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ CONT-MJR‬هﻲ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪ Current Layer‬و ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ ‪ Freeze‬اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪.0‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر آﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Contour Properties‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Contour‬‬ ‫‪) Style Manager‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(215‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Manage Styles‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Contour Styles in Drawing‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) SMOOTH‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪ (215‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪215‬‬ ‫اﻵن ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﻖ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ‪) SMOOTH‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(216‬‬

‫‪- 118 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪216‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر )إدراج اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ( ‪Labeling Contours‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ )آﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ( ﻟﻠﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺑﻨﺎءا ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﻖ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Contour Style‬‬ ‫‪.Manager‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Contour Labels‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Group Interior‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪) Contour Labels – Increment‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(217‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ 2‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Elevation Increment‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪Add multiple interior labels along each‬‬ ‫‪) contour‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (217‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪217‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺧﻂ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺘﻬﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(218‬‬ ‫‪- 119 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪218‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﺮب اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ‪ ،Start Point‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ أﺧﺮى ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ‬ ‫اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ End Point‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء اﻷﻣﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(218‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺠﺪ أن ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺘﻬﺎ آﻞ ‪ 2‬ﻣﺘﺮ و ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻳﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻧﺺ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ و آﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ m‬ﺑﻌﺪ آﻞ ﻣﻨﺴﻮب آﻼﺣﻘﺔ‬ ‫و ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺗﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ و ﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻮاﻗﻊ ﻣﺎزاﻟﺖ ﺧﻂ واﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺘﻤﻞ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(219‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪219‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ وﺿﻊ )ﻣﻜﺎن( اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ آﻨﺘﻮر ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻀﻪ ‪ Grips‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮد ﻓﻲ وﺳﻂ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﺛﻢ اﺳﺤﺐ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮل ﺧﻂ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(220‬‬

‫‪- 120 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪220‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﻜﺎن اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﻤﺮاد وﺿﻊ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻓﻴﻪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(220‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻞ اﻟﻨﺺ )اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ( ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻗﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﺬف ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ آﻨﺘﻮر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Contour Labels‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Delete Labels‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺧﻂ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬف اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر أي ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﺮاد ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ هﺬا اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء اﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﺬف ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ آﺎﺋﻦ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪Converting Contour Objects‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﺣﻴﺎن ﻣﻦ اﻟﻀﺮوري ﺗﺰوﻳﺪ اﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر و اﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻠﻜﻮن ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ ،Land Desktop‬و ﻓﻲ هﺬﻩ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ آﺎﺋﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪ Contour Object‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺘﺎج ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ إﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ‪ ،Polyline‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻷﻣﺮ ‪ Explode‬ﻣﻦ أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪AutoCAD‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫و ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﻓﺈن اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻤﻤﺜﻞ ﺑﻤﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ‪ Polyline‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ إﻟﻰ آﺎﺋﻦ آﻨﺘﻮر ‪.Contour Object‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ آﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﻦ آﺎﺋﻦ آﻨﺘﻮر إﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺛﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى إﻟﻰ آﺎﺋﻦ آﻨﺘﻮر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ أدﺧﻞ ‪ Explode‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ آﻨﺘﻮر ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ List‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ذات ﺧﻂ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻂ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻵن أﺻﺒﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ‪) lightweight polyline‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(221‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪221‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Esc‬ﺛﻢ أﻏﻠﻖ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪.AutoCAD Text Window‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Contour Utilities‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Convert Polylines‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺧﻂ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ List‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻤﺤﻮل‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺨﻂ اﻵن أﺻﺒﺢ ‪) AECC_CONTOUR‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(222‬‬

‫‪- 121 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪222‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬أﻏﻠﻖ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪.AutoCAD Text Window‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ آﺎﺋﻦ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻮن إﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﻓﺴﻴﺘﺤﻮل إﻟﻰ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ و ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‬ ‫إﻟﻰ آﺎﺋﻦ آﻨﺘﻮر واﺣﺪ‪ ،‬و ﻟﺤﻞ هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺣﺬف اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ آﺎﺋﻦ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﻢ إﻟﻰ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪Editing Contours‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أواﻣﺮ اﻟـ ‪ AutoCAD‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻣﺜﻞ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ Trim‬و ‪ Extend‬و ‪ Break‬و ‪ Erase‬و إن آﺎن ﻧﺴﻖ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ‪ Contour Style‬ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ اﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ )ﻣﺨﻮﻟﺔ( ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻘﻄﻊ و ﻣﺪ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر ﻟﺘﺒﻘﻴﻬﺎ داﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺴﻮرة‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ 0‬آﺤﺪود ﻟﻸرض‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت و ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﺪ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪.0‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬أدﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ Trim‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﺤﺪود )ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻷﺑﻴﺾ اﻟﻠﻮن( آﺤﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﻊ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪة ﺧﺎرج اﻟﺤﺪود ﻟﻘﻄﻌﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(223‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬أدﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ Extend‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﺤﺪود )ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻷﺑﻴﺾ اﻟﻠﻮن( آﺤﺪ ﻟﻠﻤﺪ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻮاﻗﻌﺔ داﺧﻞ اﻟﺤﺪود ﻟﻤﺪهﺎ ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(223‬‬

‫‪- 122 -‬‬

By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez

Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials

223 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬

- 123 -

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ ﻋﺸﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ‪Lesson 15: Generating Sections‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﺘﺘﻌﻠﻢ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ ‪ Cross Sections‬ﻹﻇﻬﺎر ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻷرض ﺳﻮاء ﻟﺴﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ أو ﻋﺪة‬ ‫أﺳﻄﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر ‪ C:\Land Projects 2006‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣــﻦ ﻗــﺎﺋـﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧــــﺘــﺮ ‪ TUTORIAL1‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧــــﺘـــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-15.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ و ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ ‪Defining and Processing Sections From Single Surface‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮد ﺑﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺧﻄﻮط ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﻬﺎ آﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت‪ ،‬أوﻻ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ‬ ‫‪ EG‬آﺎﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Select Surface‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(224‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Selection‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ EG‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(224‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪224‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Define Sections‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ W-E‬ﻟـ ‪ Group Label‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ AA‬ﻟـ ‪.Section Label‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪد اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ AA‬آﺄول ﺧﻂ ﻗﻄﺎع‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ AA‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺛﻢ و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬أﻳﻀﺎ اﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪) AA‬اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪد اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ BB‬آﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻗﻄﺎع‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ BB‬ﻟـ ‪ Section Label‬و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ BB‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺛﻢ و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬ ‫‪ Endpoint Osnap‬أﻳﻀﺎ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪) BB‬اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺷﻜﻞ اﻷرض ﻓﻴﺠﺐ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺧﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ أوﻻ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺨﻄﻮة اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ هﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Process Sections‬‬ ‫‪- 124 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﻵن ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎن ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺎن ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ ‪Importing Sections From Single Surface‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Import Sections‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Datum‬و هﻮ اﺳﻢ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮأﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬أﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ AA‬ﻹدراج اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ AA‬ﻋﻨﺪهﺎ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬أﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ BB‬ﻹدراج اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ BB‬ﻋﻨﺪهﺎ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬آﺒﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪ Zoom in‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﻨﺸﺄة ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(225‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪225‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ‪ :‬اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﻤﺠﺎور ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎع ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎس ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع و ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻷﻣﺮ ‪Scale‬‬ ‫و ﻓﻲ اﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ 225‬اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ AA‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ BB‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻧﺼﻪ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ‪.50‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻴﻒ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪.Grid for Sections‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Grid‬آﺎﺳﻢ ﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬اﺧﺘﺮ آﺘﻠﺔ اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ‪ Section datum block text‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎع ‪) AA‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ اﻟﻜﺘﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ و ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺮاهﺎ ﻟﺼﻐﺮهﺎ اﻟﻤﺘﻨﺎهﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ 2‬ﻟـ ‪ Elevation increment‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ 5‬ﻟـ ‪.Offset increment‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬اﺧﺘﺮ آﺘﻠﺔ اﻟﻨﺺ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ‪ Section datum block text‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎع ‪ BB‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ‪ 2‬ﻟـ ‪ Elevation increment‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ‪ 5‬ﻟـ ‪ Offset increment‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻨﻬﻲ اﻷﻣﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(226‬‬

‫‪- 125 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪226‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء و ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ‪Creating and Processing Sections from Multiple Surfaces‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﻄﺎع ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )‪ Existing Ground (EG‬و ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ‪Finishing Ground‬‬ ‫)‪.(FG‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﺮؤﻳﺔ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر أو ادﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ ZE‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Multiple Surfaces On/Off‬و ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض‬ ‫اﻟﺠﻤﻠﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ "‪) "Multiple surfaces are on‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(227‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪227‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Define Multiple Surfaces‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Multiple Surface Selection‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select from‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح ‪ Ctrl‬ﻣﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮار ﻓﻲ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ EG‬و ‪) FG‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(228‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪228‬‬ ‫‪- 126 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮض ‪ EG‬و ‪ FG‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) Current‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ .(228‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪد اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ CC‬آﺨﻂ ﻗﻄﺎع ﺛﺎﻟﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Define Sections‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ SE-NW‬ﻟـ ‪ Group Label‬و ادﺧﻞ ‪ CC‬ﻟـ ‪.Section Label‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪ CC‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﺛﻢ و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Endpoint Osnap‬أﻳﻀﺎ اﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻂ ‪) CC‬اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء اﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫اﻟﺨﻄﻮة اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ هﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Process Sections‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺠﻮاب اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Yes‬ﻹﻟﺤﺎق اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﺑﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ‪Append to the end‬‬ ‫‪.of the existing section file‬‬ ‫‪ -12‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ SE-NW‬ﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ هﺎﻣﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮم اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﻌﺮض أﺳﻤﺎء اﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(229‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪229‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ أﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدة ‪Importing Sections From Multiple Surfaces‬‬ ‫‪-1‬‬ ‫‪-2‬‬ ‫‪-3‬‬ ‫‪-4‬‬ ‫‪-5‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Import Sections‬‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ ‪ Datum‬آﺎﺳﻢ ﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫أدﺧﻞ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮأﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ ﻗﻤﺔ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ (CC‬ﻹدراج اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ CC‬إﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ‪.Datum‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﺘﺮى اﻟﻘﻄﺎع )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(230‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪230‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮآﺔ ‪Viewing Dynamic Sections‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮآﺔ اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ آﺄداة ﻟﺘﺸﺎهﺪ ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎت ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ‪Dynamic‬‬ ‫‪ Sections‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ و ﻟﺼﻘﻬﺎ إﻟﻰ أي ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎت اﻟـ ®‪ Windows‬أو اﺳﺘﻴﺮادهﺎ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﻣﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻗﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ واﺣﺪ أو ﻋﺪة أﺳﻄﺢ‪ ،‬إن ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ اﻵن ﻓﻲ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻟﺬا ﻓﺈن اﻷﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻜﻮن ﺑﻨﺎءا ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﻦ ‪ EG‬و ‪)FG‬ﻟﻘﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎرهﻤﺎ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﺘﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ آﺎﻣﻼ أو أدﺧﻞ ‪ ZE‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sections‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.View Quick Section‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ CC‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻘﻄﺎع‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ و إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪ ،‬و ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Section‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻘﻄﺎع‪.‬‬ ‫‪- 127 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮأﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎع‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Section‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ Section Window‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ View Properties‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Quick‬‬ ‫‪) Section Properties‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(231‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ Grid Settings‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ 2‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Vertical factor‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ 10‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Minimum Vertical Increment‬و‬ ‫أدﺧﻞ ‪ 50‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Minimum Horizontal Increment‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(231‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪231‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،Surface Color Settings‬و ﻻﺣﻆ أن اﻟﻠﻮن اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎر ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ ‪ EG‬هﻮ اﻷﺧﻀﺮ و اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ FG‬هﻮ‬ ‫اﻷزرق و ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ اﻷﻟﻮان ﺑﺤﺪ أﻗﺼﻰ ﻟـ ‪ 8‬أﺳﻄﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪدة‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ CC‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ ‪ Grips‬و ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ‪ CC‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺾ اﻟﺨﻂ ﺛﻢ اﻣﺴﻚ إﺣﺪى هﺬﻩ اﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺾ و ﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪.(232‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪232‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ أن ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺜﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﻜﺲ اﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(233‬‬

‫‪- 128 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪233‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد ﻗﻄﺎع ﺳﺮﻳﻊ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﻣﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Utilities‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻘﻄﺎع اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Import Quick Section‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ tutorial1‬آﺒﺎدﺋﺔ ﻻﺳﻢ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ ‪.Layer name prefix for surfaces‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﻮرد ﻗﻄﺎع ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﻴﺘﻢ وﺿﻊ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻟﻜﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﻔﺮدة‪ ،‬و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﺒﺎدﺋﺔ ‪ tutoral1‬ﻓﺈن اﺳﻢ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ ‪ EG‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮن ‪) tutorial1-EG‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(234‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪234‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Datum‬آﺎﺳﻢ ﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ‪.Datum‬‬ ‫‪ -12‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ CC‬آﻮﺻﻒ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎع‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -13‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ 2‬آﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎس اﻟﺮأﺳﻲ ‪.Vertical scale factor‬‬ ‫‪ -14‬أﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﺘﺪرج ﻋﻨﺪهﺎ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -15‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﻘﺎرﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد اﻟﻘﻄﺎع اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -16‬أﻏﻠﻖ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟﻘﻄﺎع اﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ رؤﻳﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎع ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(235‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪235‬‬ ‫‪- 129 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎدس ﻋﺸﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻮر اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪Lesson 16: Visualizing Surfaces‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻴﺰات ﺗﺼﻮر اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ Surface Visualization‬ﻟﺘﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﻘﻤﻢ اﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ‪ Elevation Banding‬و ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﺟﺮﻳﺎن‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ‪ ،Watershed‬و اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪ Object Viewer‬ﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر ‪ C:\Land Projects 2006‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣــﻦ ﻗـﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧــﺘـــﺮ ‪ TUTORIAL1‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧـــــﺘـــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-16.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫إﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع ‪Creating Elevation Banding‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت ﻟﻼرﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت ﺑﺄوﺟﻪ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪.3D Faces‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Select Surface‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select surface to Open‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Area1C‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(236‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪236‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Surface Display‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Banding - 3D Faces‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Surface Elevation Shading Settings‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(237‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪ Create Skirts‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ 2‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Vertical factor‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ 6‬أﻣﺎم ‪Number of‬‬ ‫‪) ranges‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (237‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Auto-Range‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Terrain Range Limits‬‬

‫‪- 130 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪237‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬اﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ .(238‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Surface Range‬‬ ‫‪.Definitions‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪238‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Surface Elevation Shading Settings‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻣﺮة‬ ‫أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﺤﺬف اﻟﻤﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ‪ Erase old range view‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة‬ ‫‪.Range Statistics‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﺑﻌﺪ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت إﺣﺼﺎﺋﻴﺔ اﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎت )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (239‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬

‫‪- 131 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪239‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ رﺳﻢ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻻرﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت ﺑﺄوﺟﻪ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ‪) 3D Faces‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(240‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪240‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة اﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪Viewing Surfaces in the Object Viewer‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮاض ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻻرﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪.Object Viewer‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Utilities‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Object Viewer‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Window Selection‬اﺧﺘﺮ آﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻻرﺗﻔﺎع ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻻرﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(241‬‬

‫‪- 132 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫إن إﻃﺎر اﻷﺳﻼك ‪ Wire frame‬هﻮ ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﻌﺮض اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪ ،Object Viewer‬و ﻟﻤﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت أﻳﻀﺎ ﺳﺖ ﻧﻈﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮض ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻣﺪة ‪ Orthogonal‬و أرﺑﻌﺔ أﺧﺮى ﻣﺘﺴﺎوﻳﺔ اﻟﻘﻴﺎس ‪ Isometric‬ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺎر ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ‪ ،‬اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪AutoCAD Editor‬‬ ‫هﻮ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪.Object Viewer‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪241‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أدوات اﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪Using Object Viewer Navigation Tools‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم أدوات اﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ و اﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪ Zoom in and out‬و اﻟﺘﺠﻮال ‪ Pan‬ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎهﺪ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺘﻮازﻳﺔ ‪ Parallel views‬و اﻟﻘﺮب و اﻟﺒﻌﺪ ‪ Move in and out‬ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻤﻨﻈﻮرة ‪ ،Perspective views‬اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت هﻮ اﻟﻤﺸﺎهﺪ اﻟﻤﺘﻮازﻳﺔ ‪.Parallel views‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪) Zoom‬ﺛﺎﻟﺚ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻒ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي( ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮك ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻔﺄرة ﻣﻊ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ و اﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(242‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪242‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪) Pan‬راﺑﻊ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻒ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي( ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻔﺄرة ﻣﻊ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﻮل ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(243‬‬

‫‪- 133 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪243‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪) Perspective‬ﺛﺎﻧﻲ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻟﻴﺴﺎر ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻒ اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ( ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻔﺄرة ﻣﻊ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﺘﺘﺤﺮك ﻗﺮﺑﺎ و ﺑﻌﺪا )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(244‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪244‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺎت أﺧﺮى ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ﻟﺘﺤﺪد ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﻤﺘﻮازي ‪.Parallel View‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ‪) Orbit‬ﺛﺎﻧﻲ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻒ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي( ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ اﻟﻔﺄرة ﻣﻊ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺰر‬ ‫اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﺘﻠﻒ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺣﻮل اﻟﺜﻼث ﻣﺤﺎور ‪ X‬و ‪ Y‬و ‪) Z‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(245‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪245‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﻧﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻻرﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎت ﻗﻢ ﺑﻐﻠﻖ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪.Object Viewer‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬إن آﻨﺖ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ اﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎع اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺘﻪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻷﻣﺮ ‪.Undo‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺬف ﻃﺒﻘﺎت ﻣﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎت ‪.Range View‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Terrain Layers‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Range Layers‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺠﻮاب اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Erase‬ﻟﺘﻤﺴﺢ ﻃﺒﻘﺎت ﻣﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎت ‪.Erase range view layers‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎت ﻣﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ‪Delineating Watershed Areas‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ إﻟﻰ أﻣﺎآﻦ ﺗﺠﻤﻊ اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﺑﺒﻨﺎء ﻧﻤﻮذج ﻟﻤﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ و اﺳﺘﻴﺮاد ﺣﺪود ﻣﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪.Terrain Model Explorer‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ AREA1C‬و ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﻪ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ TIN data‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Watershed‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Calculate Watershed‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (246‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Watershed Parameters‬‬

‫‪- 134 -‬‬

By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez

Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials

246 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄآﺪ‬Minimum Depression Area ‫ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ أﻣﺎم‬50 ‫ و‬Minimum Depression Depth ‫ ﻣﺘﺮ أﻣﺎم‬1 ‫ ادﺧﻞ‬-3 .(247 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Must exceed both minimum area and minimum depth ‫ﻣﻦ إزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم‬

247 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ Done ‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر رﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬OK ‫ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Calculate Watershed ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬OK ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬-4 .(248 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬calculating watershed

248 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .(249 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Terrain Model Explorer ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ ﻣﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة‬

- 135 -

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪249‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﻴﺮاد ﺣﺪود ﻣﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Watershed‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Import Watershed Boundaries‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Watershed Display Settings‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(250‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬اﻗﺒﻞ آﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺼﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮاري ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(250‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪250‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬أﻏﻠﻖ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬و ﺷﺎهﺪ ﺣﺪود ﻣﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(251‬‬ ‫‪- 136 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪251‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﺘﺮى أرﻗﺎم ﻣﺠﺎري اﻟﻤﻴﺎﻩ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ إدراﺟﻬﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(252‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪252‬‬

‫‪- 137 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ‪ :‬ﺣﺴﺎب آﻤﻴﺎت ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪Lesson 17: Calculating Site Volumes‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Site‬و اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Stratum‬ﻟﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ‪ Volume Calculation‬ﺛﻢ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ Grid‬و ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت ‪ Composite‬ﺛﻢ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ‪ Sections‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﺎرن ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺮق اﻟﺜﻼث‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر ‪ C:\Land Projects 2006‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ TUTORIAL1‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧـﺘـــﺮ ‪Lesson-‬‬ ‫‪ 17.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ و اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪Defining a Stratum and a Site‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﻦ ‪ EG‬و ‪ FG‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ و اﻟﺬي ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ اﻟﻤﺮاد ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Select Current Stratum‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Define Stratum‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪.(253‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ Stratum1‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Name‬و ادﺧﻞ ‪ EG and FG Surfaces‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Description‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(253‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪253‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Select‬ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ اﻷول ‪ Surface 1‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Select Surface‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ EG‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Define Stratum‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(254‬‬

‫‪- 138 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪254‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Select‬ﻟﻠﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ‪ Surface 2‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Select Surface‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ FG‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Define Stratum‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻷول ‪ Surface 1‬هﻮ ‪ eg‬و أن اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ‪ Surface 2‬هﻮ ‪) fg‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (255‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ OK‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮار‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪255‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Site Definition‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Site Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪.Volume Site Settings‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Volume Labeling‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ m3‬أﻣﺎم اﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ‪) Suffix‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (256‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬

‫‪- 139 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪256‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Site Definition‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Define Site‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ 20‬درﺟﺔ ‪ Degree‬ﻟﺰاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺪوران‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ dot P) .P‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ (P‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم أداة ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ 1‬ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ أﺻﻞ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪Site‬‬ ‫‪.Base Point‬‬ ‫إن أدوات اﻟﺘﺮﺷﻴﺢ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ أواﻣﺮ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ‪ dot P).P‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ (P‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪد رﻗﻢ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ‪ dot G).G‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ (G‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺎر ﺟﺮاﻓﻴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ‪ dot N).N‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ (N‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪد إﺣﺪاﺛﻲ اﻟﺸﻤﺎل و اﻟﺸﺮق‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ 2‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻟﻤﻘﺎس اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪) M‬اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ M‬ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ X‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ‪ 2‬آﻤﻘﺎس ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪) N‬اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ N‬ﻳﻘﺎﺑﻠﻪ اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ Y‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -12‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ dot P).P‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ (P‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ أداة ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺛﻢ و ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟـ ‪Endpoint OSNAP‬‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺮآﻦ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ اﻟﻌﻠﻮي ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(257‬‬

‫‪- 140 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪257‬‬ ‫‪ -13‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺠﻮاب اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ No‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ زاوﻳﺔ اﻟﺪوران أو ﻣﻘﺎس اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪change the size or‬‬ ‫‪ ،rotation of the grid‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ No‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺣﺪود اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ‪ erase the old site outline‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.Enter‬‬ ‫‪ -14‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ Site1‬ﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ و اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ أﺻﺒﺢ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﻦ و ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪Calculating Grid Volumes‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪ ،‬إن هﺬﻩ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﻮم ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮآﻴﺐ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ آﻼ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺳﺘﺨﺮاج‬ ‫اﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ و ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮب ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺮاج اﻟﻔﺎرق ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ آﻞ ﺧﻄﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Grid Volumes‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Calculate Total Site Volume‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Site Librarian‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select site‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Site1‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (258‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Grid Volume‬‬ ‫‪.Settings‬‬

‫‪- 141 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪258‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬أﻗﺒﻞ آﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (259‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Volume‬‬ ‫‪.Results Surface‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪259‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ G1-Site1‬أﻣﺎم ‪ New Surface‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(260‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪260‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮ آﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻤﻮاﻗﻊ و ﻃﺒﻘﺎت ﻋﺪة ﻓﻤﻦ اﻷﻓﻀﻞ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﺳﻢ ﻷﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ذات ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ و ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫أﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﻴﺪ اﻻﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻒ اﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻓﻲ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﻋﻨﺪ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻷﺳﻄﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪ Command Line‬آﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ‪ 3376‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺮ و ‪20380‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﻠﺮدم و ‪ 17004‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﺼﺎﻓﻲ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(261‬‬

‫‪- 142 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪261‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻇﻬﺎر ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ FG‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪ Layers‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ‪ Layer Properties Manager‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪Fg-srf-‬‬ ‫‪) bdr‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (262‬ﻟﻌﺮض ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ FG‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻹﻏﻼق ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪262‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Select Surface‬و ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Volume Surface‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (263‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ G1-Site1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺛﻢ أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪263‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Surface Display‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Quick View‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(264‬‬

‫‪- 143 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪264‬‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ FG‬و اﻣﺘﺪاد ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺗﻢ اﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺑﻌﺎت اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎ ﺧﺎرج ﺣﺪود اﻟﺴﻄﺢ ‪ FG‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺎهﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت‪ ،‬و ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻔﺎدي ذﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺳﻄﺤﻴﻦ ﺑﺤﺪود‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ أو ﺑﻠﺼﻖ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ ‪ FG‬ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ‪ ،EG‬و آﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ M‬و ‪ N‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻪ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪد اﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺧﺎرج اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت ‪Calculating Composite Volumes‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Composite Volumes‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Calculate Total Site Volume‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Site Volume Librarian‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select site‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Site1‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (265‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Composite‬‬ ‫‪.Volume Settings‬‬

‫‪- 144 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪265‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬أﻗﺒﻞ آﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OK‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (266‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Volume‬‬ ‫‪.Results Surface‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪266‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ C1-Site1‬أﻣﺎم ‪) New surface‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (267‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪267‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻟﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت ‪ Composite‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪Command Line (268‬‬ ‫آﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ‪ 3475‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺮ و ‪ 20940‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﻠﺮدم و ‪ 17465‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﺼﺎﻓﻲ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪268‬‬ ‫‪- 145 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺘﺢ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة اﻟـ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬و ﺗﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ‪.C1-Site1‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض اﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬة ‪.Terrain Model Explorer‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ Volume‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ C1-Site1‬و ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ زر اﻟﻔﺄرة اﻷﻳﻤﻦ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪Surface Display‬‬ ‫و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Quick View‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬ﺟﺎﻧﺒﺎ ﻟﺘﺮى اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(269‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪269‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼق ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Terrain Model Explorer‬و ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ أدﺧﻞ ‪ Redraw‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻤﺤﻮ ﺧﻄﻮط ﺳﻄﺢ‬ ‫اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت ﻻ ﻳﺤﺪث ﻗﻄﻊ آﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺎت و ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﻮط ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎت‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ذات دﻗﺔ‬ ‫أﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻃﺮﻗﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻓﻔﻲ اﻟﻤﺜﺎل اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﺻﺎﻓﻲ آﻤﻴﺔ اﻟﺤﻔﺮ و اﻟﺮدم آﺎن ‪ 17465‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ آﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ‪ 17004‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ‪Calculating Section Method Volumes‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺎب ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت اﻟﻤﺘﺠﺎورة و ﺗﻀﺮب ﻓﻲ‬ ‫اﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎت ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫أوﻻ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ اﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ‪ Average End Area Sections‬ﻟﻜﻼ اﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Section Volumes‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Sample Sections‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Site Volume Librarian‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select site‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Site1‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (270‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Section‬‬ ‫‪.Volume Settings‬‬

‫‪- 146 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪270‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Volume Calculation Type‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪ Average end area‬ﺛﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Direction‬اﺧﺘﺮ )‪M (x‬‬ ‫)اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(271‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Volume Corrections‬اﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼت ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (271‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪OK‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻟﻜﻼ اﻟﺴﻄﺤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪271‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ و ﻋﺮض ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(272‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪272‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﺐ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺎت اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Section Volumes‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Calculate Volume Total‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Site Volume Librarian‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select site‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ) Site1‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (273‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Section‬‬ ‫‪.Volume Settings‬‬

‫‪- 147 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪273‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬اﻗﺒﻞ آﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Section Volume Settings‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (274‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪274‬‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎت ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ Command Line (275‬آﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ‪ 3478‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺮ و ‪ 21012‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﻠﺮدم و ‪ 17534‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﺼﺎﻓﻲ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪275‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ‪Viewing the Volume Report‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻠﻘﻲ ﻧﻈﺮة ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼث ﻃﺮق اﻟﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Volume Reports‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Site Reports‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪) Site Volume Corrections‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(276‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬اﻗﺒﻞ آﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻢ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (276‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪.Site Volumes‬‬

‫‪- 148 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪276‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ أن اﻟﺜﻼث ﻃﺮق ﺗﻌﻄﻲ آﻤﻴﺎت ﻣﺘﻘﺎرﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼف ﻣﻘﺪارﻩ ‪ 3%‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ أآﺒﺮ آﻤﻴﺔ ) ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪(Section Average End Area‬‬ ‫‪ 17534‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ و ﻗﻴﻤﺔ أﻗﻞ آﻤﻴﺔ )ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ 17004 (Grid‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺈﺗﺒﺎع اﻟﻄﺮق اﻟﺜﻼث ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬و إن آﺎﻧﺖ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﺮآﺒﺎت ‪ Composite‬هﻲ أدق اﻟﻄﺮق و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻋﺘﻤﺎد‬ ‫اﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ اﻟﺜﻼث ﺣﻴﺚ أن اﻟﻔﺮوق ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺪى اﻟـ ‪ 5%‬و ﻟﻜﻦ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ اﻟﻔﺮق ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺤﺴﺎﺑﺎت ﻏﻴﺮ اﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺎت اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (277‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪277‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎب آﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ أرض ‪Calculating Parcel Volumes‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﺣﻴﺎن ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﻟﻰ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﻟﺠﺰء ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬و ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻟﺠﻐﺮاﻓﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎت اﻷﺻﻐﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪة‪.‬‬

‫‪- 149 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ‪ Parcel Volumes‬ﻟﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﻟﻘﻄﻊ اﻷراﺿﻲ اﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮة‪ ،‬أوﻻ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ اﻷرض ‪ Parcel‬ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر إﺣﺪى‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪدي اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﺣﺪود ﻗﻄﻊ اﻷراﺿﻲ ‪ Parcels Boundary Polylines‬ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪) Layers‬أو ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل ‪ Layer‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪ Layer Properties Manager‬و ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ Subsites‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﺣﺪود ﻗﻄﻊ اﻷراﺿﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Parcels‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Define from Polylines‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﺣﻮل اﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ اﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮط‬ ‫اﻟﺼﻔﺮاء اﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (278‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء اﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪278‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺤﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ اﻷرض اﻷوﻟﻰ ‪.Parcel 1‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Grid Volumes‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Calculate Parcel Volumes‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Site Volume Librarian‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select site‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Site1‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (279‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Parcel‬‬ ‫‪.Volume Librarian‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪279‬‬ ‫‪- 150 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select parcel‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) 1‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (280‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪280‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺣﺴﺎب اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ اﻷرض ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ‪) Command Line‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (281‬آﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ‪ 2058‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺮ و ‪ 3356‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﻠﺮدم و ‪ 1298‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﻟﺼﺎﻓﻲ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪281‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺮ و اﻟﺮدم ‪Generating Cut and Fill Contours‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺮ و اﻟﺮدم ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ اﻟﻜﻤﻴﺎت ‪.C1-Site1‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ أﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪) Layers‬أو ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈدﺧﺎل ‪ Layer‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ (Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪ Layer Properties Manager‬و ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻋﺮض اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺘﺎن ‪ Subsites‬و ‪ Fg-srf-bdr‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Surface‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Select Surface‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Volume Surface‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select surface to open‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) C1-Site1‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (282‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬

‫‪- 151 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪282‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Contours‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Create Contours‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Intervals‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Both Minor and Major‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ 0.5‬ﻣﺘﺮ أﻣﺎم ‪ Minor Interval‬و ‪ 2.5‬أﻣﺎم ‪Major‬‬ ‫‪) Interval‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(283‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪283‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻞ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺠﻮاب اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﻜﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ‪Erase old‬‬ ‫‪.contours‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ رﺳﻢ ﺧﻄﻮط آﻨﺘﻮر اﻟﺤﻔﺮ و اﻟﺮدم ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﻋﻤﻖ اﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﺤﻔﺮ و اﻟﺮدم ﻋﺒﺮ اﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(284‬‬ ‫‪- 152 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪284‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ و اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ‪Generating Grid Ticks and Labels‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ و ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻹﻇﻬﺎر ﻗﻴﻢ اﻟﺤﻔﺮ و اﻟﺮدم ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﺎط ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Terrain‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Grid Volumes‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Grid Volume Ticks‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Site Volume Librarian‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select site‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Site1‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (285‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Grid Volume‬‬ ‫‪.Ticks‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪285‬‬ ‫‪- 153 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ 5‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Tick interval‬و أﻳﻀﺎ ‪ 5‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Label interval‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ 1‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Label precision‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(286‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Label Position‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Right‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (286‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪286‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ No‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﻌﺪم ﻣﺴﺢ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ‪.Erase old grid ticks‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ و اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﺘﺮى إﺣﺪى ﻋﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ و اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(287‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪287‬‬ ‫‪- 154 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻋﺸﺮ‪ :‬رﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ و اﻟﺤﻠﺰون ‪Lesson 18: Drawing Tangents, Curves, and Spirals‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﺘﺘﻌﻠﻢ آﻴﻔﻴﺔ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﻤﺎس ‪ Tangent‬و ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ‪ Curve‬و ﺣﻠﺰون ‪ Spiral‬ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫‪ ، Alignment Centerline‬و ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﺟﺪﻳﺪ و ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط أﺧﺮى ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻤﺎس ﺑﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ داﺋﺮي‬ ‫و ﺣﻠﺰون‪ ،‬و اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﺪاول اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ رﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ و إﻳﺼﺎل ﻋﺪة ﺧﻄﻮط اﻧﺤﻴﺎز‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر ‪ C:\Land Projects 2006‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣــــﻦ ﻗﺎﺋـــــﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ TUTORIAL2‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧــــﺘــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-18.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫رﺳﻢ ﻣﻤﺎس ‪Drawing Tangents‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﻤﺎس ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ آﺎﺋﻨﺎن ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪدي اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ‪ ،Polylines‬إﺣﺪى اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺳﺘﺤﺪد ﺑﺎﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت‪ ،‬و آﺘﻠﺔ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪ Station Block‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪد ﺧﻂ ﻣﺤﺎذاة اﻟﻜﻮﺑﺮي اﻟﺬي ﻳﻌﺒﺮ ﻓﻮق ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-1‬‬ ‫‪-2‬‬ ‫‪-3‬‬ ‫‪-4‬‬ ‫‪-5‬‬ ‫‪-6‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Lines/Curves‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Line‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ dot P) .P‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ (P‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم أداة ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﺎط ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ 1‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ 2‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫أدﺧﻞ ‪ dot N) .N‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ (N‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم أداة ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪5018657.3345‬‬ ‫آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻺﺣﺪاﺛﻲ اﻟﺸﻤﺎﻟﻲ ‪ Northing‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ 273727.9099‬آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻺﺣﺪاﺛﻲ اﻟﺸﺮﻗﻲ ‪Easting‬‬ ‫و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫أدﺧﻞ ‪ dot N) .N‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ اﻟﺤﺮف ‪ (N‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ أداة ﺗﺮﺷﻴﺢ اﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻴﺎت‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ‪Insertion Osnap‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺨﺘﺎر آﺘﻠﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (288‬إﻟﻰ اﻟﺸﻤﺎل ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ آﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪288‬‬ ‫ﺻﺎر ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ اﻵن ﺛﻼث ﻣﻤﺎﺳﺎت ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺤﺎذاة اﻟﻜﻮﺑﺮي )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(289‬‬

‫‪- 155 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪289‬‬ ‫رﺳﻢ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت ‪Drawing Curves‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ داﺋﺮي ‪ Circular Curve‬ﺑﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ ‪ 700‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ اﻟﺜﻼث ﻣﻤﺎﺳﺎت اﻟﻼﺗﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﺳﻤﻬﻢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Lines/Curves‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Curve Between Two Lines‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس اﻷول )اﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﺬي ﻳﻘﻊ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬و ‪ (2‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Factor‬اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ و هﻮ ‪ Radius‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ 700‬آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﺼﻒ‬ ‫اﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس اﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪ Factor‬اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ و هﻮ ‪ Radius‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ 700‬آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﺼﻒ اﻟﻘﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء اﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﺜﻼث ﻣﻤﺎﺳﺎت ﺑﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت داﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﻹآﻤﺎل ﺧﻂ ﻣﺤﺎذاة اﻟﻜﻮﺑﺮي )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(290‬‬

‫‪- 156 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪290‬‬ ‫رﺳﻢ ﺣﻠﺰون ‪Drawing Spirals‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﻧﻈﺎم ﺣﻠﺰون‪-‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ‪-‬ﺣﻠﺰون ‪ Spiral-Curve-Spiral‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ أﺟﺰاء ﻣﻤﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪Tangent Segments‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺤﺎذاة اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫أوﻻ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻧﻚ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﺤﻠﺰون ‪.Clothoid‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Lines/Curves‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Spirals‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Spiral Type‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪) Spiral Type‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(291‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ‪) Clothoid‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (291‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪291‬‬

‫‪- 157 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Lines/Curves‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Spirals‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Fit Tangent-Tangent‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Fit Spirals - Tangent to Tangent‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Description‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Spiral-Curve-Spiral‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (292‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪292‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس اﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ 850‬آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠـ ‪ Radius‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ 300‬آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟـ ‪.Spiral A in‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ 300‬ﻟـ ‪ Spiral A out‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﻤﺎﺳﺎن ﺑﺤﻠﺰون و ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻩ ‪ 850‬ﻣﺘﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(293‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪293‬‬ ‫اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺠﺪاول اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪Working with Speed Tables‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﺟﺪاول اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻧﻈﺎم ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت ﻟﺠﺰء ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ‪ ،Roadway Alignment‬ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ‬ ‫اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﻬﺪف إﻟﻰ ارﺗﻔﺎع ﻣﺘﺰاﻳﺪ ‪ Superelevation‬ﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺟﺪول اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎت ‪ Canada06‬ﻟﺘﺼﻤﻢ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺟﺪول‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻨﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 110 km/hr‬و ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻩ ‪ 1000‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 4‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪- 158 -‬‬

By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez

Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials

‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬Edit Speed Table ‫ و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Speed Tables ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Lines/Curves ‫ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬-2 .Select Speed Table ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬OK ‫( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬294 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬canada06.sup ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Speed Table ‫ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬-3 .Horizontal Speed Table

294 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ .(295 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬110 km/hr ‫ اﺧﺘﺮ‬Design Speed ‫ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬-4 .Save Horizontal Speed Table ‫( ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬295 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬Save As ‫ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬-5

295 ‫ﺷﻜﻞ‬ Horizontal ‫ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬Save ‫( ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬296 ‫ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬File Name ‫ أﻣﺎم‬Tutorial ‫ ادﺧﻞ‬-6 .Speed Table

- 159 -

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪296‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺼﻒ اﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪول اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎت )‪ (1000 m radius curve‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Edit‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق‬ ‫اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) New/Edit Speed Table Item‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(297‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪297‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ 350‬أﻣﺎم ‪) 4 Lane Spi A‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (298‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Horizontal‬‬ ‫‪.Speed Table‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪298‬‬ ‫‪- 160 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -9‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Save‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﻧﻈﺎم ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ذو أرﺑﻊ ﻣﺠﺎزات ﺑﻨﺎءا ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺪول اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎت ‪ Tutorial‬ﻟﺨﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Lines/Curves‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Speed Tables‬و ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Create Curves‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪) Horizontal Speed Table‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(299‬‬ ‫‪ -12‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ أن ‪ Tutorial.sup‬هﻮ ﺟﺪول اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬و أن ‪ 110 km/hr‬هﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ اﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎرة )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(299‬‬ ‫‪ -13‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺼﻒ اﻟﺜﺎﻣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪول اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎت )‪) (1000 m radius‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (299‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Select‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪299‬‬ ‫‪ -14‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Four Lanes‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺤﻠﺰون‪-‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ‪-‬ﺣﻠﺰون ‪) Spiral-Curve-Spiral System‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(300‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪300‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻤﻤﺎﺳﺎت ﺑﻨﻈﺎم ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺟﺪول اﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎت اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(301‬‬

‫‪- 161 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪301‬‬ ‫رﺑﻂ ﻋﺪة آﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﺧﻄﻮط اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪Attaching Multiple Alignment Objects‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻨﺤﺪر ‪ Ramp‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج‪ ،‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ رﺑﻂ ﻋﺪة آﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﺧﻄﻮط اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪،Alignment Objects‬‬ ‫أوﻻ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻂ ﻣﺰاح ‪ Offset‬ﻋﻦ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪ Alignment‬ﺑـ ‪ 26‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻧﺤﻮ اﻟﺠﻨﻮب آﺒﺪاﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﺪر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 5‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ اآﺘﺐ ‪ Offset‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ 26‬آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ Distance‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز اﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬اﺧﺘﺮ أي ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﻊ أﺳﻔﻞ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز آﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻟﻠﺨﻂ اﻟﻤﺰاح )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (302‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء اﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪302‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻴﻒ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮﻩ ‪ 1280‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻟﻠﻄﺮف اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﺪر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Lines/Curves‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Attach Multiple‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﺪر اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪.Endpoint Osnap‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ A‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Arc‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪.Radius‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ 1280‬آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﺼﻒ اﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Length‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ 206.8‬آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﻮل‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﻠﺰون ﻣﺮآﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪- 162 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -8‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ S‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Spiral‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ C‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪.Compound‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ‪ 1280‬آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﺼﻒ اﻟﻘﻄﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ L‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Length‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ 54.397‬آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﻮل‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ 250‬آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﻗﻄﺮ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪.Ending Radius‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﺑﻂ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﺰون اﻟﻤﺮآﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -12‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ A‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Arc‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Radius‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪250‬‬ ‫آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﺼﻒ اﻟﻘﻄﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -13‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Length‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ 106.304‬ﻣﺘﺮ آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﻮل‪.‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﺑﻂ ﺣﻠﺰون ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -14‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ S‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Spiral‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ O‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪.Outcurve‬‬ ‫‪ -15‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ 250‬آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻨﺼﻒ اﻟﻘﻄﺮ ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ A‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ A Factor‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ 146.615‬آﻤﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪.A‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻬﻲ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﺪر ‪ Ramp Alignment‬ﺑﺮﺳﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻤﺎس‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -16‬ادﺧﻞ ‪ T‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Tangent‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ 206.016‬آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﻮل‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -17‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻨﻬﻲ اﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﺪر ﺑﻌﺪة ﺧﻄﻮط اﻧﺤﻴﺎز )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(303‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪303‬‬ ‫أﻟﻘﻲ ﻧﻈﺮة ﻋﻠﻰ آﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(304‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪304‬‬ ‫‪ -18‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬

‫‪- 163 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﺘﺎﺳﻊ ﻋﺸﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ و ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻄﻮط اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪Lesson 19: Defining and Editing Alignments‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪ Alignment‬ﻟﺨﻂ اﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻳﻖ ‪ Roadway Centerline‬أو ﺧﻄﻮط ﻟﻠﺤﺎﺟﺰ‬ ‫اﻟﺤﺠﺮي ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ ‪ Curb Line‬أو ﻇﻮاهﺮ أﺧﺮى ﻣﻦ ﻇﻮاهﺮ اﻟﻄﺮق‪ ،‬و ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز و ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺗﻘﺎرﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺧﻄﻮط‬ ‫اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪.Horizontal Alignment Editor‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر ‪ C:\Land Projects 2006‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣــﻦ ﻗـﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧـــﺘــﺮ ‪ TUTORIAL2‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗـﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧــﺘــــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-19.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﺧﻄﻮط ‪Defining an Alignment from a Polyline‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز اﻷول ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻷﺣﻤﺮ اﻟﻠﻮن‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignments‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Define from Polyline‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﻇﻬﻮر ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ X‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮن اﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻄﺮف اﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻂ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪(305‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ آﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز و ﺗﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Define Alignment‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪305‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ A1‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Alignment Name‬و ادﺧﻞ ‪ Alignment #1 - Seguin Trail‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Description‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪.(306‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬أﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ 0.000‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Starting Station‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (306‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬

‫‪- 164 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪306‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪ Alignment‬اﻷول ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط ‪ ،Polyline‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز اﻷول ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ اﻟﻮﺻﻒ و اﻻﺳﻢ و اﻟﺮﻗﻢ و اﻟﻄﻮل و ﻣﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪء و ﻣﺤﻄﺔ اﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(307‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪307‬‬ ‫إذا آﺎن ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺣﻠﺰون ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪ Entities or Objects‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignments‬و ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Define from Objects‬و ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﺤﻠﺰون ﻣﻦ ‪.Define from Polyline‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪة آﺎﺋﻨﺎت ‪Defining an Alignment from Objects‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪة آﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 2‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت ‪ Layer List‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ CL-2‬و ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼق ﻋﺮض ﺑﺎﻗﻲ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(308‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪308‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز أﺻﻔﺮ اﻟﻠﻮن ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ CL-2‬ﻓﻲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز هﺬا ﻣﺆﻟﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪة آﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﺎ اﻟﺒﻌﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮم‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﺑﺪأ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignments‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Define from Objects‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬اﺧﺘﺮ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ اﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﻤﺎس اﻷول اﻟﺬي ﻳﻘﻊ إﻟﻰ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ X‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮن اﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪء ﻟﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(309‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎر آﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎت ﻣﻦ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(309‬‬

‫‪- 165 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪309‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪد اﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ‪ Reference Point‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪد ﻗﻴﻤﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Select Reference Point‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ أدﺧﻞ ‪ Apostrophe) '-View‬ﺛﻢ ‪ Dash‬ﺛﻢ ‪) (View‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪ (310‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ R‬ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎر ‪ Restore‬و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﻤﺮاد اﺳﺘﺮدادﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ و اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Enter‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪310‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪ Center Osnap‬اﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ اﻟﺪاﺋﺮة اﻟﺘﻲ أﻣﺎﻣﻚ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (311‬آﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪15778.63‬‬ ‫آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪311‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Define Alignment‬‬

‫‪- 166 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -9‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ A2‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Alignment Name‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ Alignment #2 - Highway 69‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Description‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬ ‫‪.(312‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪312‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬أﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ أﻣﺎم ‪ Starting Station‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪ Alignment‬اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪة آﺎﺋﻨﺎت و أﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮض ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻄﺮ اﻷواﻣﺮ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(313‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪313‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ View‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Named Views‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ View‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ ‪ Named‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪ Set Current‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪314‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة و ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪Viewing and Editing Alignment Data‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﺴﺘﺨﺪم ‪ Horizontal Alignment Editor‬ﻟﻤﺸﺎهﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ و اﻟﺤﻠﺰون ﺑﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‬ ‫اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ‪.Alignment A2‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignments‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Edit‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ‪.Horizontal Alignment Editor‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺸﺎهﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ اﻷول ﺑﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Edit‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻒ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ‪ Station‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Edit Curve‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪(315‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪.Curve Detail‬‬

‫‪- 167 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪315‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﺑﻌﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ اﻷول اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Next‬ﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ إﻟﻰ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(316‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪316‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎت اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ اﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ‪.Horizontal Alignment Editor‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ إﺣﺪاﺛﻲ اﻟﺸﻤﺎل ‪ Northing‬ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ‪ 40‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻧﺤﻮ اﻟﺠﻨﻮب‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻓﻲ اﻟﺼﻒ اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻟﻌﻤﻮد ‪ Northing‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﺨﺎﻧﺔ ‪ 5018525.433‬آﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻹﺣﺪاﺛﻲ اﻟﺸﻤﺎل اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Enter‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(317‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪317‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ آﻼ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ و اﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺘﺎﺧﻢ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس ﻣﻦ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‪.‬‬ ‫‪- 168 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺗﻘﺎرﻳﺮ ﻟﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪Generating Alignment Reports‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﻓﺬة ‪ Horizontal Alignment Editor‬و ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Reports‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪.Output Settings‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Output Options‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) File‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(318‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪318‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Output File Name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (318‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Output File Name‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎر ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ Report1.prn‬أﻣﺎم ‪) File name‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(319‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪319‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Save‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Output Settings‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ‪Horizontal‬‬ ‫‪.Alignment Editor‬‬

‫‪- 169 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -5‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Station/Curve‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﺒﺪء اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻄﺔ اﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬أﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻻﺳﻢ و اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ اﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺮ و هﻮ ‪ Report1.prn‬و ﺗﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪) Horizontal Alignment Station and Curve Report‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(320‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪320‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻧﺘﻬﺎﺋﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﺎهﺪة اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ OK‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﻟﻰ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Horizontal Alignment Editor‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Save‬ﺛﻢ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ أن ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺮك ﻟﻴﻌﻜﺲ اﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ اﻟﺬي ﺗﻢ ﻓﻲ اﻟـ ‪.Horizontal Alignment Editor‬‬

‫‪- 170 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫اﻟﺪرس اﻟﻌﺸﺮون‪ :‬إﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺤﻄﺎت و إزاﺣﺔ ﻟﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪Lesson 20: Creating Alignment Stationing and‬‬ ‫‪Offsets‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻄﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ اﻟﺰﻳﺎدة اﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎوﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء إزاﺣﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺮق ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫اﻟﺮﺻﻴﻒ و ﺣﻮاف اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت و هﻜﺬا‪...‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس‪:‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ File‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Open‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Open Drawing: Project Based‬‬ ‫إن اﻟﻤﺴﺎر اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎت اﻟﻤﺸﺮوع ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ اﻟﻤﺴﺎر ‪ C:\Land Projects 2006‬ﻓﺈن آﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﻏﻴﺮت هﺬا اﻟﻤﺴﺎر أﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺼﻴﺐ اﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻴﺠﺐ أن ﺗﻀﻊ ذﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ اﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎر‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋـﻤﺔ ‪ Project Name‬اﺧـــﺘــــﺮ ‪ TUTORIAL2‬و ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Select Project Drawing‬اﺧــــﺘـــﺮ‬ ‫‪ Lesson-20.dwg‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Projects‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Workspaces‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Land Desktop‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮض ﻗﻮاﺋﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Land Desktop‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ‪Changing Station Settings‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺔ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﻄﺔ اﻷﺳﺎس و إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎدﺋﺔ ﻻﺳﻢ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ و إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﺒﺪاﻳﺔ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت و‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻤﻤﺎس‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignments‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Station Display Format‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Edit Station‬‬ ‫‪.Format‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Station/Chainage Numeric Format‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ Station base value‬إﻟﻰ ‪ 1000‬ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬ ‫اﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ اﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻖ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(321‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪321‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignment‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Alignment Labels‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Alignment Labels‬‬ ‫‪.Settings‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Layer Prefix‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ (Asterisk Hyphen) *-‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Layer Prefix‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(322‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻘﻮم هﺬا ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ اﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز آﺒﺎدﺋﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎت اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺸﺄ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ إﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺤﻄﺎت ﻟﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‪.‬‬

‫‪- 171 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪322‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Label Text‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ BC‬أﻣﺎم ‪ Beginning of curve‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ EC‬أﻣﺎم ‪) Curve/Tangent intersect‬اﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (322‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ أن إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت ﻳﻤﻜﻦ اﻧﺠﺎزﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ واﺣﺪة و ﻟﻜﻦ هﺬا اﻟﺪرس ﻳﺮﻳﻚ آﻴﻔﻴﺔ إﻧﺸﺎء ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت ﺑﻨﺴﻖ ﻣﺤﺪد ﻟﻠﻨﺺ و‬ ‫إزاﺣﺔ أوﻻ ﺛﻢ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت ﺑﻨﺴﻖ ﻟﻠﻨﺺ و إزاﺣﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignment‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Station Label Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Alignment Station Label‬‬ ‫‪.Settings‬‬ ‫‪ -7‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪ Station point labels‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ 50‬م أﻣﺎم ‪ Station label increment‬و ‪ 10‬م أﻣﺎم‬ ‫‪ Station tick increment‬و ‪ 2‬م أﻣﺎم ‪) Station label offset‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (323‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪323‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Utilities‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Text Style‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Text Style‬‬ ‫‪- 172 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -9‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Style Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) 2MM‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (324‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Close‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪324‬‬ ‫اﻵن ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻧﺴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﻄﺎت ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز ‪Generating Alignment Stationing‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﻄﺎت ﻟﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‪ ،‬أوﻻ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز اﻟﻨﺸﻂ أو اﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻴﻜﻮن ‪.A1b‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignments‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Current Alignment‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار‬ ‫‪.Alignment Librarian‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Selection‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪) A1b‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (325‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪325‬‬ ‫‪- 173 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -3‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignments‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Create Station Labels‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬اﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت اﻟﺒﺪء و اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﺤﺬف ﻃﺒﻘﺎت اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(326‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪326‬‬ ‫اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻀﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت ﻟﺨﻂ اﻻﻧﺤﻴﺎز‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignments‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Station Label Settings‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪Alignment Stationing‬‬ ‫‪.Settings‬‬ ‫‪ -6‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ أﻣﺎم ‪ Station labels‬ﺛﻢ اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Station point labels‬ﺛﻢ أدﺧﻞ ‪ 25‬م أﻣﺎم ‪Station label‬‬ ‫‪) offset‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (327‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪327‬‬ ‫‪- 174 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫‪ -7‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Utilities‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Set Text Style‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Text Style‬‬ ‫‪ -8‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Style Name‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ 3MM‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Close‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(328‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪328‬‬ ‫اﻵن ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻧﺴﻖ ﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -9‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignments‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Create Station Labels‬‬ ‫‪ -10‬اﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت اﻟﺒﺪء و اﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى ﻟﺘﻘﺒﻞ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر‬ ‫اﻻﻓﺘﺮاﺿﻲ ‪ Yes‬ﻟﺤﺬف ﻃﺒﻘﺎت اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت ذات أﻧﺼﺎف أﻗﻄﺎر ﺻﻐﻴﺮة ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج اﻟﻌﻨﻮﻧﺔ أﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺪوﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻮح‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -11‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ اﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪ Zoom in‬ﻟﺘﺸﺎهﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﻧﺔ ﻧﻘﺎط اﻟﻤﺤﻄﺎت )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(329‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪329‬‬ ‫‪- 175 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫إﻧﺸﺎء إزاﺣﺔ ‪Creating Offsets‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ هﺬا اﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ إزاﺣﺔ ﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ اﻟﺮﺻﻴﻒ و اﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎت و اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮض اﻟﺮﺳﻢ ‪ Zoom out‬ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ -2‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Alignments‬اﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Create Offsets‬ﻟﺘﺴﺘﻌﺮض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪.Alignment Offset Settings‬‬ ‫‪ -3‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Outer offset‬أدﺧﻞ ‪ 0‬م أﻣﺎم ‪ Left offset‬و أدﺧﻞ ‪ 25‬م أﻣﺎم ‪) Right offset‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(330‬‬ ‫‪ -4‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Second offset‬أﺧﺘﺮ ‪ Second offset‬ﺛﻢ ادﺧﻞ ‪ 6.5‬م أﻣﺎم ‪ Left offset‬و أﻳﻀﺎ ‪ 6.5‬م أﻣﺎم ‪Right‬‬ ‫‪) offset‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(330‬‬ ‫‪ -5‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ‪ Inner offset‬ﺗﺄآﺪ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ أﻣﺎم آﻼ ﻣﻦ ‪ Left offset‬و ‪ Right offset‬هﻲ ‪ 4.25‬م )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ (330‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫أﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.OK‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪330‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ اﻟﺨﻄﻮط اﻟﻤﺰاﺣﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ )اﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪.(331‬‬

‫‪- 176 -‬‬

‫‪By: Mohamed Raafat Hafez‬‬

‫‪Autodesk Land Desktop Tutorials‬‬

‫ﺷﻜﻞ ‪331‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Alignment Offset Settings‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ اﻟﺨﻴﺎر ﻟﺤﺬف ﺧﻄﻮط ﻣﺰاﺣﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮدة ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ و‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺧﻄﻮط ﻣﺰاﺣﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﻌﺮاض ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ‪ Alignment Offset Settings‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Cancel‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪوق اﻟﺤﻮار ﻟﻠﺨﺮوج ﻣﻨﻪ دون ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺧﻄﻮط ﻣﺰاﺣﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪- 177 -‬‬